Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Students can Download Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Plus Two Chemistry Coordination Compounds One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The ions or molecules bound to the central atom/ion in the coordination entity are called ___________.
Answer:
Ligands

Question 2.
In [Co(C2O4)3]3-, the coordination number of cobalt is _________.
Answer:
six

Question 3.
Which complex has a square planar structure?
(a) [Ni(CO)4]
(b) [NiCI4]2-
(c) [Ni(H2O)6]2+
(d) [CU(NH3)4]2+
Answer:
(d) [CU(NH3)4]2+

Question 4.
Say TRUE or FALSE.
[Co(NO3)(NH3)5]SO4 and [Co(NO3)(NH3)4(SO4)](NH3) are ionisation isomers.
Answer:
FALSE

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 5.
The formula of Wilkinson’s catalyst is _________.
Answer:
[RhCl(PPh3)3]

Question 6.
The charge of Ni in [Ni(CO)4] is
(a) +1
(b) +2
(c) 0
(d) +4
Answer:
(c) 0

Question 7.
The central metal ion present in chlorophyll?
(a) Fe2+
(b) Cu2+
(c) Mg2+
(d) CO2+
Answer:
(c) Mg2+

Question 8.
EDTA is a dentate ligand
(a) uni dentate
(b) bidentate
(c) Tridentate
(d) hexadentate
Answer:
(d) hexadentate

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 9.
Which is an example for homoleptic complexes
(a) [Co(NH3Cl2]+
(b) [CoNH3)6]3+
(c) [Cr(NH3)(H2O)3]Cl3
(d) [CoCl2(en)2]
Answer:
(b) [CoNH3)6]3+

Question 10.
Ammonia will not form complex with
(a) Ag2+
(b) Pb2+
(c) Cu2+
(d) Cd2+
(e) Fe2+
Answer:
(b) Pb2+

Plus Two Chemistry Coordination Compounds Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In a seminar, Jishnu argued that the “hexaflourocobaltate(III) ion is highly paramagnetic than hexacyanoferrate(III) ion.

  1. Do you agree with this words?
  2. Explain it.
  3. Write the formulae of the given coordination compounds.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. CN is a strong field ligand so paring occurs. Number of unpaired electron decreases, paramagnetism decreases. F is a weak field ligand so no paring occurs, paramagnetism increases.
  3. [CoF6]3-and [Co(CN)6]3-

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 2.
Raju: Coordination compounds are coloured.
Ramu: No, co-ordination compounds are colourless.

  1. Whose statement is correct?
  2. Explain the reason for your answer.

Answer:

  1. Raju’s statement is correct. Coordination compounds are usually coloured.
  2. The colour of coordination compounds is due to d-d transition.

Question 3.
Why is geometrical isomerism not possible in tetrahedral complexes having two different types of unidentate ligands coordinated with the central metal ion?
Answer:
Tetrahedral complexes do not show geometrical isomerism because the relative positions of the unidentate ligands attached to the central metal atom are the same with respect to each other.

Question 4.
FeSO4 solution mixed with (NH4)2SO4 solution in 1:1 molar ratio gives the test of Fe2+ ion but CuSO4 solution mixed with aqueous ammonia in 1:4 molar ratio does not give the test of Cu2+ ion. Explain why?
Answer:
FeSO4 does not form any complex with (NH4)2SO4. Instead, it forms a double salt FeSO4. (NH4)2SO4.6H2O which dissociates completely into ions. CuSO4 when mixed with NH3 forms a complex [CU(NH3)4]SO4 in which the complex ion [CU(NH3)4]2+ does not dissociate to give Cu2+ ion.

Question 5.
Write the geometrical isomers of [Pt(NH3)(Br)(Cl) (py)] and how many of these will exhibit optical isomerism?
Answer:
The complex [Pt(NH3)(Br)(Cl)(py)] will form three geometrical isomers:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 1
Square planar complexes of this type will not show geometrical isomerism.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 6.
Aqueous copper sulphate solution (blue in colour) gives:

  1. a green precipitate with aqueous potassium fluoride and
  2. a bright green solution with aqueous potassium chloride. Explain these experimental results.

Answer:
Aqueous copper sulphate contains a coordination entity, [Cu(H2O)4]2+ which is blue in colour. Water molecule is a weaker ligand than Cl and F.
1. On addition of aqueous KF solution, a new complex entity is formed wich is green in colour.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 2

2. On addition of aqueous solution of KCl, an another bright green complex entity is formed which is soluble in water.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 3

Question 7.
What is the coordination entity formed when excess of aqueous KCN is added to an aqueous solution of copper sulphate? Why is it that no precipitate of copper sulphide is obtained when H2S(g) is passed through this solution?
Answer:
Aqueous solution of copper sulphate contains Cu2+ ions in the form of complex entity, [Cu(H2O)4]2+ and H2O ligand is a weak ligand. When excess of KCN is added, a new coordination entity, [Cu(CN)4]2- is formed due to the following reaction:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 4

Cyanide ligand, CN is a strong field lignad and stability constant of [Cu(CN)4]2- is quite large and thus practically no Cu2+ ions are left in solution. On passing H2S gas, no CuS is formed due to non- availability of Cu2+ ions in solution.

Question 8.
Optical isomerism is usually exhibited by complexes containing polydentate ligand. What do you mean by ligand?
Answer:
Ligand is a neutral molecule or charged ion which can donate a lone pair of electron to the metal.

Question 9.
Coordination complexes are of different types. Name the compounds.

  1. [Cr(H2O)5Cl2]
  2. K3[Cr(C2O4)3]

Answer:

  1. Pentaaquadichloridochromium(II)
  2. Potassiumtrioxalatochromate(III)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 10.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds.

  1. K3M[Fe(CN)6]
  2. [C0(NH3)5(CO3)]Cl

Answer:

  1. Potassiumhexacyanoferrate(III)
  2. Pentaamminecarbanatocobalt(III) chloride

Question 11.
[Fe(CN)6]3- is paramagnetic, while [Fe(CN)6]4- is diamagnetic. Explain with the help of VB theory.
Answer:
In [Fe(CN)6]3- iron is in +3 state and in [Fe(CN)6]4, iron is in +2 state. [Fe(CN)6]3- contains five electrons in d-level (3d5). In this complex iron undergoes d2sp3 hybridisation.

Due to the presence of one unpaired electron, [Fe(CN)6]3-, is paramagnetic. In [Fe(CN)6]4- iron contains six electrons in d-level (3d6). It undergoes d2sp3 hybridisation and has no unpaired electrons. Hence, [Fe(CN)6]4- is diamagnetic.

Plus Two Chemistry Coordination Compounds Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Look at the following two diagrams.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 5

  1. Is the diagrams I and II correct? Justify. If the figure is not correct, redraw it.
  2. Which theory is related to this?
  3. Explain briefly, how this theory is applicable to octahedral complexes.

Answer:
1. No, Figure (II) is wrong.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 6

2. Crystal field theory.

3. In the case of octahedral complexes, the ligands are approaching the ‘d’ orbitals through the axis. As a result of this the energy of dx²-y² and d orbitals increases and the energy of the remaining three orbitals decreases. The orbitals which possess high energy are represented as ‘eg’ levels and the orbitals which possess less energy are represented as “t2g” levels.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 2.
A list of coordination compounds are given below:
[Cr(H2O)6] Cl3, [Co(NH3)5Br] SO4, [Co(NH3)5NO2]2+ and [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]. Which type of isomerism do these compounds exhibit?
Answer:
Hydrate Isomerism, Ionisation Isomerism, Linkage Isomerism, Geometrical Isomerism.

Question 3.
The following are examples of coordination compounds. Identify the type of isomerism exhibited by each of them and write their possible isomers,

  1. [Cr(NH3)5Br]SO4
  2. CrCl3.6H2O
  3. [PtCl2(NH3)2]

Answer:

  1. Cr(NH3)5Br]SO4 – Ionisation isomerism – [Cr(NH3)5SO4]Br
  2. CrCl3.6H2O – Hydrate isomerism – [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2.H2)
  3. PtCl2(NH3)2] – Geometrical isomerism

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 7

Question 4.
What will be the correct order for the wavelengths of absorption in the visible region for the following:
[Ni(NO2)6]4-, [Ni(NH3)6]2+, [Ni(H2O)6]2+
Answer:
The order of the ligand in the spectrochemical series is H2O < NH3 < NO2. Hence the wavelength of the light observed will be in the order:
[Ni(H2O)6]2+ < [Ni(NH3)6]2+ < [Ni(NO2)6]4-

Thus, the wavelength of light absorbed (E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)) will be in the opposite order:
[Ni(H2O)6]2+ > [Ni(NH3)6]2+ > [Ni(NO2)6]4-

Question 5.
In a classroom discussion, Sajan argued that CN, OH, Cl etc. are examples for neutral ligands.

  1. Do you agree with his argument?
  2. If not, give a reason with the help of examples.
  3. What do you mean by chelating ligand and chelation?

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. They are charged ligands.
  3. If a polydentate ligand is coordinated to the metals, a ring structure is obtained. It is called chelate and the phenomenon is called chelation.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 6.
Ligands can be arranged according to the magnitude of Δ0 and the arrangement is given below:
l- < Br < Cl < F < OH < H2O < NH3 < (en)

  1. What is this series known as?
  2. Is the sequence incorrect order?
  3. Identify the weak field and strong field ligands.

Answer:

  1. Spectrochemical series
  2. Yes
  3. The ligands above water are strong ligand and the ligands below water are weak ligands.

Weak filed ligands – l, Br, Cl, F, OH, H20 Strong filed ligands – NH3, en

Question 7.
Consider the following coordination compounds.

  • [Co(NH3)5 Cl] SO4
  • [Co(NH3)5 SO4]Cl

1. Write down the IUPAC name of these compounds.
2. Name the isomerism exhibited by these compounds.

Answer:
1. The IUPAC name of compounds

  • Pentaamminechloridocobalt(III) sulphate
  • Pentaamminesulphatocobalt(III) chloride

2. Ionisation isomerism

Question 8.
Consider the following compounds:
[Co (NH3)5 NO2] Cl2 and [Co (NH3)5 ONO] Cl2

  1. Identify the isomerism exhibited by these compounds.
  2. Explain ionisation isomerism with example.

Answer:

  1. Linkage isomerism
  2. This form of isomerism arises when the counter ion in a complex salt is itself a potential ligand and can displace a ligand which can then become the counter ion.
    e.g. [Co(NH3)5Cl] SO4 & [Co(NH3)5SO4] Cl

These complexes ionises as:

  • [Co(NH3)5Cl] SO4 → [Co(NH3)5Cl]2+ + SO42-
  • [Co(NH3)5SO4] Cl → [Co(NH3)5SO4]+ + Cl

Question 9.
Consider the statement: Crystal Field Theory (CFT) is applicable to octahedral and tetrahedral complexes.

  1. Is this statement true?
  2. Explain the crystal field splitting in octahedral complexes with the help of a neat diagram.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. In an octahedral crystal field the ligands are approaching the metal along the axes. Hence, the energy of dx²-y² and d orbitals (eg set) increases by 3/5Δ0and that of dxy, dyz and dxz orbitals (t2g set) decreases by 2/5 Δ0

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 8

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 10.
When a ligand approaches to an octahedral complex, the degenerate ‘d’ orbitals undergoes splitting.

  1. What will be the observation?
  2. What are the factors influencing crystal field splitting energy?

Answer:
1. The energy of dx²-y² and d orbitals (eg set) increases by 3/5Δ0 and that of dxy, dyz and dxz orbitals (t2g set) decreases by 2/5 Δ0

2. The factors influencing crystal field splitting energy.

  • Nature of the ligand
  • Geometry of the complex
  • Valency of the metal

Question 11.
What will happen when a ligand approaches to a tetrahedral complex?
Answer:
the energy of dxy, dyz and dxz orbitals (t2g set) increases by 2/5Δt and that of dx²-y² and d orbitals (eg set) decreases by 3/5 Δt.

Question 12.
Consider the complex ion [Ti (H2O)6]3+ In the case of an octahedral complex, what is the condition for the pairing of forth electron in the d- level?
Answer:
If the crystal field splitting energy is greater than the pairing energy, the fourth electron will pair at the t2g level and if the pairing energy is greater than the crystal field splitting energy the electron will go to the on eg level.

Question 13.
Is bidentate ligands same as the amidentate ligands? Justify.
Answer:
A bidentate ligand like (en), can form two coordinate bonds with the metal at the same time.
An amidentate ligand like -NO2 can form only one coordinate bond with the metal at a time. But it can ligate through two different atoms.

Plus Two Chemistry Coordination Compounds Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following table:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 9

Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 24

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 2.
1. Write the IUPAC names of the following coordination compounds.

  • [Pt(NH3)Cl(NO2]2)
  • K3[Cr(C2O4)3]

2. Identify the type of isomerism exhibited by the following complexes and distinguish them. [Co(NH3)5SO4] Br and [Co(NH3)5Br] SO4
Answer:
1. The IUPAC names of the coordination compounds:

  • Amminechloridonitrito-N platinum(II)
  • Potassiumtrisoxalatochromate(III)

2. Ionisation isomerism.
The first compound gives pale yellow ppt. with AgNO3 solution whereas the second compound gives white ppt. with BaCl2 solution.

Question 3.
1. Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds:

  • [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
  • K4[Fe(CN)6]

2. A list of coordination compounds are given below:

  • [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3,
  • [CO(NH3)5 Br]SO4,
  • [CO(NH3)5 NO2]2+,
  • [CO(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]

Which type of isomerism do these compounds exhibit?
Answer:
1. The IUPAC name of the coordination compounds:

  • Diamminedichloridoplatinum(II)
  • Potassium hexacyanoferrate(II)

2. Type of isomerism

  • [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 – Hydrate isomerism
  • [CO(NH3)5 Br]SO4 – Ionisation isomerism
  • [CO(NH3)5 NO2]2+ – Linkage isomerism
  • [CO(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] – Coordination isomerism

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 4.
1.. Write down the IUPAC name of

  • K4[Fe(CN)6]
  • [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]

2. On the basis of VBT, explain why [Fe(H2O)6]2+ is strongly paramagnetic while [Fe(CN)6]3- is weakly paramagnetic.
Answer:
1. The IUPAC names are:

  • Potassium hexacyanoferrate(II)
  • Diamminedichloridoplatinum(II)

2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 11
In [Fe(H20)6]2-, iron undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation (inner orbital complex). It has four unpaired electrons and hence it is highly paramagnetic.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 12

In [Fe(CN)6]3+. iron undergoes d2sp3 hybridisation (outer orbital complex). It has only one unpaired electron. Hence, it is less paramagnetic.

Question 5.
The names of some co-ordination compounds are given below:

  • EDTA
  • Haemoglobin
  • cis-platin
  • Vitamin B12
  • D-penicillamine
  • Chlorophyll
  • Ni(CO)4

a. Classify the above compounds on the basis of application of coordination compounds?
b. There are given some of the coordination compounds Name them.

  1. K3[Fe(C2O4)3]
  2. [Cr(CN)3]3+
  3. [CoSO4(NH3)4]NO3
  4. [CO(NO2)3(NH3)3]

Answer:
a. On the basis of application of coordination compounds:

  • In biological system – Haemoglobin, Vitamin B12, Chlorophyll.
  • Estimation of hardness of water – EDTA.
  • Extraction of metals – Ni(CO)4
  • In medicine – D-penicillamine, cis-platin

b. The coordination compounds are:

  1. K3[Fe(C2O4)3] – Potassiumtrioxalatoferrate(III)
  2. [Cr(CN)3]3+ – Trisethylenediaminechromium(III) ion
  3. [CoSO4(NH3)4]NO3 – Tetraamminesulphato- cobalt(III) nitrate
  4. [CO(NO2)3(NH3)3] – Triamminetrinitrito-N-cobalt(III)

Question 6.
1. Name the following compounds.

  • [Pt(NH3)4 ] [CuCl4]
  • [PtCl2 (NH3)4] Br2

2. What type of isomerism is shown by the following coordination compounds?

  • [Pt(NH3)4 ] [CuCl4]
  • [Cr(en)3]3+

Answer:
1.

  • Tetraammineplatinum(II) tetrachlorocuprate(II)
  • Tetraamminedichloridoplatinum(IV) bromide

2. Type of isomerism:

  • Coordination isomerism
  • Optical isomerism

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 7.

  1. Write the d-orbital configuration of [Ti(H2O6]2+
  2. Ti4+ is colourless. Why?
  3. Write the possible isomers of [Co(NH3)5 Br] SO4 and name them.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 13
2. In Ti4+ there are no electrons in 3d orbitals. Hence ‘d-d’ transition cannot take place. Hence it is colourless.

3. Possible isomers of [Co(NH3)5 Br] SO4 and names

  • [CO(NH3)5 Br] SO4 – Pentamminebromido- cobalt(III) sulphate
  • [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br-Pentamminesulphatecobalt(III) bromide

Question 8.
‘A’ and ‘B’ are isomers. They have the same composition. But ‘B’ cannot give the test for sulphate.

  1. Write two suitable coordination compounds which give the test for sulphate.
  2. What are the two major classes of isomerism exhibited by coordination compounds?
  3. Draw the structure of an octahedral complex that show optical isomerism.

Answer:
1. Two suitable coordination compounds which give the test for sulphate

  • [CO(NH3)5Cl]SO4
  • [Co(NH3)5Br] SO4

2. Structural isomerism, Stereoisomerism
3. [PtCl2(en)2]2+

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 14

Question 9.

  1. Write the formula of the complex ion Chloridonitro tetramminecobalt(III)?
  2. Identify the ligands, coordination number and coordination sphere.
  3. Explain the structure of Tetracarbonylnickel(O) with the help of Valence Bond Theory.

Answer:

  1. [CO(NH3)4Cl(NO2)
  2. Ligands-NH3, Cl , NO2 Coordination number -4
  3. Tetracarbonylnickel(0) – [Ni(CO)]4] – Structure

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 15
Ni(CO4) is diamagnetic as it does not contain any unpaired electron.

Question 10.
Consider the complex ion [Ti (H2O)6]3+

  1. What is its outer electronic configuration and its shape?
  2. What do you mean by crystal field splitting theory?

Answer:

  1. Ti3+ – 3d1 4s0 Octahedral
  2. In the case of an isolated gasesous metal atom/ ion all the five d-orbitals have the same energy (degenerate). Due to the presence of ligands are splitted the degeneracy of the d-orbitals is lifted.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 11.
Coordination compounds are those compounds which retain their identity even in solution and it is essential for all living matter.

  1. Name a coordination compound containing Magnesium, which is essential for plants.
  2. When we coordinate EDTAwith any metal, we get a ring structure. What is this process called?
  3. Explain.

Answer:

  1. Chlorophyll.
  2. Chelation.
  3. When a poly dentate ligand is coordinated to the metal, a ring structure is obtained, called chelate complex. Such complexes are more stable than similar complexes containing unidentate ligands.

Question 12.
Some ligands are given below. Arrange them in suitable headings.
[H2O, NH3, CN, CO, Cl, OH (en)]
1. What do you mean by the term ligand?
2. Write down the nomenclature of the coordination compounds given below.

  • K4[Fe(CN)6]
  • [Ag (NH3)2]Cl

Answer:
Neutral ligands – H2O, NH3, CO, en
Charged ligands – CN, OH, Cl
1. Ligand is a neutral molecule or charged ion which can donate atleast one lone pair of electron to the metal.
2. nomenclature of the coordination compounds

  • Potassium hexacyanoferrate(II)
  • Diamminesilver(I) chloride

Question 13.

  1. What do you mean by optically active compounds? Give two examples.
  2. Draw the ‘d’ and T forms of [Co(en)3]3+.

Answer:
1. Optically active compounds are formed by chiral moneluces i.e., molecules which do not have plane of symmetry. These isomers are non- superimposable mirror images of each other. They are optically active and rotate the plane of polarised light equally but in opposite directions.

The isomer which rotates the plane of polarised light towards left is called leavorotatory (-) while that which rotate plane towards right is called dextrorotatory (+).
e.g. [Co(en)3]3+, [PtCl2(en)2]2+
Dextro and laevo forms of these compounds are possible.

2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 16

Question 14.
What is the importance of the following coordination compounds is different fields?

  1. EDTA
  2. Gold cyanide [AU(CN)2]
  3. cis-platin
  4. [Ag(S2O3)]3-

Answer:

  1. EDTA → Estimation of hardness of water
  2. AU(CN)2 → Metallurgy
  3. cis-platin → Cancer therapy
  4. [Ag(S2O3)]3- → Photography

Question 15.
The d-block elemetns forms coordination compounds.

  1. Name the coordination compound K3 [CoF6].
  2. Write the electronic configuration of the central metal atom of the above complex by using CFT
  3. Draw the figure to show the splitting of degenerate, ‘d’ orbitals in an octahedral field.

Answer:
1. K3[CoF6] – Potassiumhexafluridocobaltate(III)
2. The electronic configuration of Co (Z = 27) is [Ar]3d74s2 In K3 [CoF6], Co is in +3 state. The configuration of Co3+ is 3d6 4s°.
3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 17

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 16.

  1. Name the compound K3[Cr(C2O4)3]
  2. Explain on the basis of VB theory that [Ni(CN)4]2- ion with square planar structure is diamagnetic and [Ni(Cl)4]2- ion with tetrahedral structure is paramagnetic.

Answer:

  1. K3[Cr(C2O4)3] – Potassiumtrioxalatochromate(III)
  2. Ni = 1s²2s²2p63s²3p64s²3d²

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 18
It is diamagnetic due to absence of unpaired electrons.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 19
∴ Due to presence of unpaired electrons it is paramagnetic.

Plus Two Chemistry Coordination Compounds NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
FeSO4 solution mixed with (NH4)2SO4 solution in 1:1 molar ratio gives the test of Fe2+ ion but CuSO4 solution mixed with aqueous ammonia in 1:4 molar ratio does not give the test of Cu2+ ion. Explain why?
Answer:
FeSO4 does not form any complex with (NH4)2SO4. Instead, it forms a double salt FeSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O which dissociates completely into ions. CuSO4 when mixed with NH3 forms a complex [CU(NH3)4]SO4 in which the complex ion [CU(NH3)4]2+ does not dissociate to give Cu2+ ion.

Question 2.
Write the geometrical isomers of [Pt(NH3)(Br)(Cl) (py)] and how many of these will exhibit optical isomerism?
Answer:
The complex [Pt(NH3)(Br)(Cl)(py)] will form three geometrical isomers:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 20
Square planar complexes of this type will not show geometrical isomerism.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 3.
Aqueous copper sulphate solution (blue in colour) gives:

  1. a green precipitate with aqueous potassium fluoride and
  2. a bright green solution with aqueous potassium chloride. Explain these experimental results.

Answer:
Aqueous copper sulphate contains coordination entity, [Cu(H2O)4]2+ which is blue in colour. Water molecule is a weaker ligand than Cl and F.
1. On addition of aqueous KF solution, a new complex entity is formed wich is green in colour.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 21

2. On addition of aqueous solution of KCl, another bright green complex entity is formed which is soluble in water.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 22

Question 4.
What is the coordination entity formed when excess of aqueous KCN is added to an aqueous solution of copper sulphate? Why is it that no precipitate of copper sulphide is obtained when H2S(g) is passed through this solution?
Answer:
Aqueous solution of copper sulphate contains Cu2+ ions in the form of complex entity, [Cu(H2O)4]2+ and H2O ligand is a weak ligand. When excess of KCN is added, a new coordination entity, [Cu(CN)4]2- is formed due to the following reaction:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 23

Cyanide ligand, CN is a strong field lignad and stability constant of [Cu(CN)4]2- is quite large and thus practically no Cu2+ ions are left in solution. On passing H2S gas, no CuS is formed due to non-availabiliy of Cu2+ ions in solution.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 5.
What will be the correct order for the wavelengths of absorption in the visible region for the following:
[Ni(NO2)6]4-, [Ni(NH3)6]2+, [Ni(H2O)6]2+
Answer:
The order of the ligand in the spectrochemical series is H2O < NH3 < NO2. Hence the wavelength of the light observed will be in the order:
[Ni(H2O)6]2+ < [Ni(NH3)6]2+ < [Ni(NO2)6]4-

Thus, the wavelength of light absorbed (E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)) will be in the opposite order:
[Ni(H2O)6]2+ > [Ni(NH3)6]2+ > [Ni(NO2)6]4-

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Students can Download Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a lens is placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. At what point does the beam converge if the lens is

  1. a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, and
  2. a concave lens of focal length 16 cm?

Answer:
Here the object is virtual and the image is real.
u = 12cm object on right and virtual.
1. f = +20 cm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 1
i.e., v = 7.5 cm. (image on right and real). It is located 7.5 cm from the lens.

2. f = -16 cm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 2
i.e., v = 48 cm. (image on right and real). Image will be located 48 cm from the lens.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 2.
Double-convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if the focal length of the lens is to be 20 cm?
Answer:
\(\frac{\mu_{2}}{\mu_{1}}\) = µ = 1.55
R1 = R2 = R
f = 20 cm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 3
R = 0.55 × 2 × 20 = 22 cm.

Question 3.
A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 144 cm and eyepiece of focal length 6.0 cm. What is the magnifying power of the telescope? What is the separation between the objective and the eyepiece?
Answer:
1. For normal adjustment.
M.P. of telescope = \(\frac{f_{0}}{f_{e}}=\frac{144}{6}\) = 24

2. The length of the telescope in normal adjustment
L = fo + fe
= 144 + 6 = 150 cm.

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Fora total internal reflection, which of the following is correct?
(a) Light travel from rarer to denser medium.
(b) Light travel from denser to rarer medium.
(c) Light travels in air only.
(d) Light travels in water only.
Answer:
(b) Light travel from denser to rarer medium.
Explanation: In total internal reflection, light travel from denser to rarer medium.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 2.
Focal length of a convex lens of refraction index 1.5 is 2 cm. The focal length of lens, when immersed in a liquid of refractive index of 1.25, will be.
(a) 10 cm
(b) 2.5 cm
(c) 5 c
(d) 7.5 cm
Answer:
(c) 5 c
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 4

Question 3.
If the refractive index of a material of equilateral prism is \(\sqrt{3}\), then angle of minimum deviation of the prism is
(a) 60°
(b) 45°
(c) 30°
(d) 75°
Answer:
(a) 60°
Explanation: A = 60°, n = \(\sqrt{3}\), D = ?
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 5
D = 60°.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 4.
Which of the following is correct for the beam which enters the medium?
(a) Travel as a cylindrical beam
(b) Diverge
(c) Converge
(d) Diverge near the axis and converge near the periphery
Answer:
(c) Converge.
Explanation: Since the refractive index is less at the beam boundary, the ray at the edges of the beam move faster compared to the axis of beam. Hence, the beam converges.

Question 5.
A beam of monochromatic light is refracted from vacuum into a medium of refraction index 1.5. the wavelength of refracted light will be.
(a) Depend on intensity of refracted light
(b) Same
(c) smaller
(d) larger
Answer:
(c) smaller
Explanation: velocity of light decreases in a medium. Hence λ decrease in a medium (v ∝ λ).

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 6.
A convex lens and a concave lens, each having same focal length of 25 cm, are put in contact to form a combination of lenses. What is the power in diopters of the combination is
Answer:
Focal length of convex lens f1 = 25 cm
Focal length of concave lens f2 = -25 cm
Power of combination in diopters,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 6

Question 7.
Fill in the blanks
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 7
Answer:
(i) n = \(\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{2 \times 10^{8}}\) = 1.5

(ii) Optical fibre

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following.

AB
Double convex(R1 -ve, R2 +ve)
Double concave(R, = ∞, R2 +ve)
Plane convex(R1 +ve, R2-ve)
Plane concave(R = ∞, R2 -ve)

Answer:

AB
Double convex(R, +ve, R2-ve)
Double concave(R1 -ve, R2 +ve)
Plane convex(R1 = α, R2 -ve)
Plane concave(R1 = α, R2+ve)

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A hemispherical transparent paperweight of radius 5m and refractive index 1.5 is placed on a table. A beam of lazar, at a distance of 2m from the centre is directed as shown in the figure.
1. Name the law which is related to refraction.
2. Locate the position of the image by completing the ray diagram.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 8
3. With the source of laser at the centre of the hemisphere, redraw the ray diagram.
Answer:
1. Snell’s law
2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 9
3. The refracted ray is undeviated.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 10

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 2.
Figure (a) below snows the image observed at the near point of eye by a boy through a simple microscope. Eye focused on near point.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 11

  1. Draw ray diagram which shows the image formation at infinity, so that the boy can observe it with a relaxed eye.
  2. Distinguish between linear magnification and angular magnification.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 12

2. Linear magnification is ratio of image height to object height. Angular magnifications is the ratio of angle subtended by the image and the object on the eye when both are at the least distance of distinct vision.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 3.
Figure shows the path of the light rays through a glass slab.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 13

  1. Name the phenomena involved here.
  2. Relate the values of n1, n2, i and r on the basis of one figure.
  3. Copy the figure of glass and draw the path of ray when n2 < n1.

Answer:
1. Refraction

2. \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 14

Question 4.
A light ray travelling from one medium to another medium is given in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 15
1. Write a mathematical relation for this refraction.

  • n2 < n1
  • n2 > n1
  • n2 = n1

2. What is a relation between angle of incidence, angle of refraction and refractive index of medium.

3. A flint glass rod when immersed in carbon disulfide is nearly invisible why?

Answer:
1. n2 < n1

2. \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)

3. Refractive index of flint glass rod and carbon disulfide are nearly equal. Hence no refraction (or reflection) take place.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 5.
A convex lens and concave lens are placed as shown in figure. For convex lens f = 10cm for concave it is 5 cm

  1. Is it converging or diverging why?
  2. If f1 = 5cm and f2 =10cm What change will occur in the optical nature of system?

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 16
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 73
f = -10 cm
Effective focal length is negative. Hence this lens is diverging.

2. Effective focal length becomes positive- Hence the lens will act as converging.

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The maximum possible magnification for a simple microscope is 10

  1. How do you increase the magnification further(1)
  2. Draw the ray diagram for compound microscope and find an expression for magnification (3)
  3. What is the advantage of forming image at infinity? (1)

Answer:
1. Use two convex lens instead of single lens.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 17
The magnification produced by the compound microscope
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 18
Multiplying and dividing by I1M1 we get,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 19

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Where m0 & me are the magnifying power of objective lens and eyepiece lens.
∴ m = me × m0 ______(1)
Eyepiece acts as a simple microscope.
Therefore \(\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}=1+\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{e}}}\) ______(2)
We know magnification of objective lens
m0 = \(\frac{V_{0}}{u_{0}}\) ______(3)
Where v0 and u0 are the distance of the image and object from the objective lens.
Substituting (2) and (3) in (1), we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 20
for compound microscope, u0 » f0 (because the object of is placed very close to the principal focus of the objective) and v0 ≈ L, length of microscope (because the first image is formed very close to the eye piece).
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 21
where L is the length of microscope, f0 is the focal length of objective lens.

3. Strain for eye, will be minimum when image is at infinity.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 2.
The refraction of light travelling from glass to water is shown in the figure.
1. The snells law in the above case can be written as………..
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 22

2. Show that c = \(\sin ^{-1}\left(_{g} n_{w}\right)\). Where C is the critical angle of glass water interface. (2)

3. Three light rays, (Red, blue and yellow) incident at one side and its refractions are shown in the figure. Copy the figure and mark Red, blue and yellow in the figure. (1)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 23
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 24

2. In this i = c using snell law, we can write
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 25

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 26

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Question 3.
When a point object is placed in front of a spherical refracting surface an image is formed in the refracting medium.
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 27
Complete the ray diagram to locate the position of the image.

2. Obtain the expression \(\frac{n_{2}}{v}-\frac{n_{1}}{u}=\frac{n_{2}-n_{1}}{R}\) for the position of image inside refracting medium.

3. If the refracting surface is concave in nature, with the same set up, locate the position of the image by drawing a ray diagram.
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 28

2. Refraction at a spherical surface:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 29
Consider a convex surface XY, which separates two media having refractive indices n1 and n2. Let C be the centre of curvature and P be the pole. Let an object is placed at ‘O’, at a distance ‘u’ from the pole.

I is the real image of the object at a distance V from the surface. OA is the incident ray at angle ‘i’ and Al is the refracted ray at an angle ‘r’. OP is the ray incident normally. So it passes without any deviation. From snell’s law,

\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
If ‘i’ and ‘r’ are small, then sin i » i and sin r » r.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 30
n1i = n2r ……….(1)
From the Δ OAC, exterior angle = sum of the interior opposite angles
i-e., i = α + θ ………(2)
Similarly, from Δ IAC,
a = r + β
r = α – β ……..(3)
Substituting the values of eq(2) and eq(3)in eqn.(1) we get,
n1(α + θ) = n2(α – β)
n1α + n1β = n2α – n2β
n1θ + n2β = n2α – n1α
n1θ + n2β = (n2 – n1)α ………….(4)
From OAP, we can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 31

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
From IAP, β = \(\frac{\mathrm{AP}}{\mathrm{PI}}\), From CAP, α = \(\frac{\mathrm{AP}}{\mathrm{PC}}\)
Substituting θ, β and α in equation (4) we get,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 32
According to New Cartesian sign convection, we can write,
OP=-u, PI = +v and PC = R
Substituting these values, we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 33
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 34
Case -1:
If the first medium is air, n1 = 1, and n2 = n,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 35

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 36

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 4.
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25cm separated by a distance of 15cm. How far from the objective should an object be placed in order to obtain the final image at

  1. Least distance of distinct vision.
  2. infinity

Answer:
1. ve = -25cm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 37
∴ uo = 5cm
Length of the tube, L= |vo| + |ue|
∴ vo = 15-5 = 10
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 38
ue = -2.5cm

2. ∴ vo = 15 – fe = 15 – 6.25 = 8.75
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 39
uo = -2.59cm

Question 5.
You may be observed that, the fish inside the aquarium appears to be raised.
1. What is the reason for this phenomenon?
2. Obtain an expression for apparent shift offish.
3. What happens to the height of the object, (That vertically stands in the aquarium) when it is observed by the fish.

  • becomes taller
  • becomes smaller
  • Does not change the height. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Refraction
  2. Expression for apparent shift is not included in the syllabus
  3. Becomes taller. When light enters from rare to denser medium, it deviates towards the normal.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 6.
High precision optical instruments uses prisms instead of mirror to reflect light.

  1. Name the phenomena used for reflecting light using prism.
  2. What is the advantage of using prism instead of mirror for reflecting light?
  3. The critical angle of water is 52°. Calculate the refractive index of water.

Answer:
1. Total internal reflection

2. Prism can be used for total internal reflection. Mirrors can’t be used for total internal reflection.

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 40
n = 1.26.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 7.
Two lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are placed in contact
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 41
1. If the object is at principal axis, draw ray diagram of the image formation by this lens.
2. Obtain a general expression for effective focal length in terms of f1 and f2.
3. How will you combine a convex lens of focal length f1 and concave lens f2 such that combination acts as

  • Converging
  • diverging
  • plane glass plate

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 42

2. Obtain an expression for the effective focal length of the combination of two thin convex lenses in contact.

3.

  • Keep in a medium of refractive index lower than that of lens.
  • Keep in a medium of refractive index higher than that of lens.
  • Keep in a medium of refractive index equal to refractive index of lens.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 8.
The light rays travelling from rarer to denser medium is given in the figure
1. Redraw the diagram and correct it
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 43
2. State the law relating i and r for retracted ray.
3. Velocity of light in water is 2.25 × 108 m/s, If angle of incidence is 30° calculate angle of refraction.
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 44

2. Snells law:
The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is a constant for a given pair of media and for the given colour of light used. This constant is known as the refractive index of second medium w.r. t. the first medium.

Explanation: If ‘i’ is the angle of incidence in the first medium and ‘r’ is the angle of refraction in the second medium, then by Snell’s law,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 45
Where 1n2 is the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium. If the first medium is air, then sin i/sin r is known as absolute refractive index of the second medium.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 46
where ‘n’ is the refractive index of the second medium.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 47

Question 9.

  1. An air bubble inside an ice block shine brilliant by……… (Refraction, Reflection, total internal reflection)
  2. Explain the above phenomenon.
  3. The light ray incident at one face of the prism is shown in figure. Copy this figure complete the path of the ray. (Take critical angle of prism C = 42°)

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 48
Answer:
1. Total internal reflection.

2. Whenarayoflightpassesfromadenserto rarer medium, after refraction the ray bends away from the normal. If we increases the angle of incidence beyond the critical angle, the ray is totally reflected back to the denser medium itself. This phenomenon is called total internal reflection.

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 49

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 10.
A convex lens produces an inverted image of size 1.4cm The size of object is 0.7cm

  1. What is magnification in the case
  2. What is the nature of image
  3. If the object is at distance 30 cm from the lens calculate focal length of the lens

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 50

2. Real, inverted, magnified

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 51

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 11.
A ray of light parallel to the principal axis of a spherical mirror falls at a point M as shown in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 52
1. Identify the type of the mirror used in the diagram. (1)
2. If focal length of the mirror is 10cm, what is the distance CF in the figure? (1)
3. Complete the ray diagram and mark the angle of incidence and angle of reflection. (2)
4. If the mirror is immersed in water its focal length will be

  • less than 10cm
  • 10cm
  • greater than 10cm
  • 20cm

Answer:
1. Concave mirror.

2. 10 cm (CF = PC – PF = R = f – 2f – f = f = 10cm).

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 53

4. 10cm. Focal length of mirror is independent of medium.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 12.
The given figure shows a compound microscope with two lenses PQ and RS.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 54

  1. Identify Objective and eyepiece in the microscope.
  2. A compound microscope has a magnification of 30. The focal length of its eyepiece is 5cm. Assuming the final image to be formed at the least distance of distinctive vision, calculate the magnification produced by the objective.
  3. What is the length of a compound microscope in normal adjustment?

Answer:
1. Objective – PQ, eyepiece – RS.
2. Magnification, M = m0 × me
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 55
3. The length of a compound microscope in normal adjustment is f0 + fe.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 13.
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25cm separated by a distance of 15cm. How far from the objective should an object be placed in order to obtain the final image at

  1. Least distance of distinct vision.
  2. infinity

Answer:
1. ve = -25cm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 56
∴ u0 = 5cm
Length of the tube, L= |v0| + |ue|
∴ v0 = 15 – 5 = 10
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 57
ue = -2.5 cm.

2. ∴ v0 = 15 – fe = 15 – 6.25 = 8.75
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 58
u0 = -2.59cm

Plus Two Physics Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A point object at a distance of 36 cm from the convex lens of focal length 10cm, is moved by 10cm in 2 sec along principle axis towards the lens. Then image will also change its position.

  1. Write the law which relates object and image distance from the lens.
  2. Find the initial and final position of the image and calculate average speed of image.
  3. A man argues that the image will move uniformly at the same speed as that of object. What is your opinion? Justify.

Answer:
1. The lens equation \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)

2. u = -36, f = 10
\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 59
If object is moved 10cm towards the lens we can find position
u = -26, f=10
v = 7.2 cm
Speed = \(\frac{7.8-7.2}{2}\) = 3cm/sec.

3. Comparing speed of object and image we can arrive at conclusion that the argument of man is false, speed of image is different from speed of object.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 2.
A ray of light parallel to the principal axis of a spherical mirror falls at a point M as shown in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 60
1. Identify the type of the mirror used in the diagram.
2. If focal length of the mirror is 10cm, what is the distance CF in the figure?
3. Complete the ray diagram and mark the angle of incidence and angle of reflection.
4. If the mirror is immersed in water its focal length will be

  • less than 10cm
  • 10cm
  • greater than 10cm
  • 20cm

Answer:
1. Concave mirror.

2. 10 cm (CF = PC – PF = R = f – 2f – f = f = 10cm).

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 61

4. 10cm. Focal length of mirror is independent of medium.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 3.
The image formed by a thin lens is shown in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 62

  1. What is the nature of the image
  2. Find out the power of the image
  3. Draw the ray diagram showing above lens forming a magnified erect, virtual image
  4. If a convex lens of focal length 20cm is kept in contact with above lens. What is the focal length and power of the combination

Answer:
1. Inverted.

2. P= \(\frac{1}{1}\) =ID.

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 63

4. P = P1 + P2
in this case f1 = 1 m, f2 = 0.2m
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 64

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 4.
A beam of light passing from one transparent medium to another obliquely, undergoes an abrupt change in direction. This phenomenon is known as refraction of light.

  1. Name the law which satisfies during this refraction.
  2. Draw a figure, which shows refraction through a parallel sided glass slab (Ray passing from air)
  3. Using the figure obtained in (b), show that the incident ray and the emergent ray are parallel to each other. Redraw the same figure, if the light is entering from a medium denser than glass. Justify your answer.

Answer:
1. Snell’s law.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 65

3. This derivation is out of syllabus.

4. The light bends away from the normal if light enter from glass to water.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 66

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 5.
A group of students are given a project for constructing a telescope and they were supplied with two biconvex lens of power 1 diopter and 0.1 dioptre.

  1. Of the two lenses, which can be used as objective?
  2. Draw the ray diagram for the formation of the image by a telescope.
  3. Arrive at an expression for magnification of a telescope.
  4. Prepare a notice/ label about the precaution to be taken while using the telescope and limitations of the telescope constructed.

Answer:
1. Biconvex lens of power 0.1 dioptre.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 67

3. Magnification:
The magnifying power of a telescope is the ratio of the angle subtended by the image at the eye to the angle subtended by the object at the objective.
\(\mathrm{m}=\frac{\text { angle subtented by the image at eye (eye piece) }}{\text { angle subtended by the object at the objective }}\)
i.e. m = \(\frac{β}{α}\) …….(1) [from figure]
But from ∆CIM, tanα = \(\frac{IM}{IC}\), α = \(\frac{IM}{IC}\)
(For small values tan α ≈ α)
from ∆C1IM, tanβ = \(\frac{IM }{\mathrm{IC}^{1}}\) , β = \(\frac{IM }{\mathrm{IC}^{1}}\)
substituting α and β in eq (1) we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 74
But IC = fo (the focal length objective lens) and ICl = fe (the focal length eyepiece lens.)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 75
In this case the length of the telescope tube is (f0 + fe).
Case 1 :
When the image formed by the objective is within the focal length of the eyepiece, Then the final image is formed at the least distant of distinct vision. In this case, magnifying power.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 76

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

4.

  • As magnifying power is negative, the final image in an astronomical telescope is inverted.
  • To have large magnifying power, fo must be as large as possible and fe must be as small as possible.
  • As intermediate image is between the two lens, cross wire (ora measuring device) can be used.
  • In normal setting of telescope, the final image is at infinity.

Question 6.
The following graph represent id curve of a optical instrument placed in air.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 77

  1. Name the device which give the above i-d curve.
  2. Obtain an expression for deviation produced by such a device.
  3. What is the relevance of the value ‘D’? Arrive at an expression for refractive index in terms of this value from (b).
  4. How is the deviation affected if the above arrangement is immersed in a liquid of refractive index less than that of the above device.

Answer:
1. Prism.

2. Refraction through a prism:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 78
ABC is a section of a prism. AB and AC are the refracting faces, BC is the base of the prism. ∠A is the angle of prism. Aray PQ incidents on the face AB at an angle i1. QR is the refracted ray inside the prism, which makes two angles r1 and r2 (inside the prism). RS is the emergent ray at angle i2.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

The angle between the emergent ray and incident ray is the deviation ‘d’.
In the quadrilateral AQMR,
∠A + ∠R = 180°
[since N1M are normal]
ie, ∠A + ∠M = 180°____(1)
In the ∆ QMR,
∴ r1 + r2 + ∠M = 180° ____(2)
Comparing eq (1) and eq (2)
r1 + r2 = ∠A ____(3)
From the ∆ QRT,
(i1 – r1) + (i2 – r2) = d
[since exterior angle equal sum of the opposite interior angles]
(i1 + i2) – (r1 + r2) = d
but, r1 + r2 = A
∴ (i1 + i2) – A = d

3. At minimum deviation D = 2i – A, r1 = r2 = r
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 79

4. Deviation decreases.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{i}}-t\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_{i}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\) is lens maker’s formula.
1. Write down lens maker’s formula for a convex lens.
2. “If a convex lens is immersed in water its converging power decrease. Do you agree with it? Justify your answer.
3. A convex lens of refractive index n2 is placed in different media. Explain optic behavior in each. If n1 is refractive index of surrounding media.

  • in medium with n2>n1
  • in a medium with n2 < n1
  • in a medium n1 = n2

Answer:
1. For convex lens R1 = +ve and R2 = -ve
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 80

2. Yes.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 81
From the above equation it is clear that, \(\mathrm{P} \alpha \frac{\mathrm{n}_{2}}{\mathrm{n}_{1}}\)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 82
In water, \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\) is less. Hence power decreases.

3. P = +ve, converging
P = -ve, diverging
P = 0, Plane glass

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 8.
Two convex lense are given in the figure A and figure B

  1. Which has more curvature
  2. Which has more power
  3. Which lens produce more magnification
  4. which lens has less focal length
  5. Can these lenses act as diverging lenses in any condition?

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 83
Answer:

  1. A
  2. A
  3. A
  4. A
  5. Yes, If we place this lens in a medium of higher refractive index than lens.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 9.
In the figure given below, PQ represents an incident ray falling in the side AB of a prism, when monochromatic light is used
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 84

  1. Draw the refracted ray, emergant ray and mark the angle of deviation
  2. Derive an equation for refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of angle of minimum deviation
  3. Draw the incident ray and refracted ray, at the angle of minimum deviation

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 85

2. Refraction through a prism:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 86
ABC is a section of a prism. AB and AC are the refracting faces, BC is the base of the prism. ∠A is the angle of prism. Aray PQ incidents on the faceAB at an angle i1. QR is the refracted ray inside the prism, which makes two angles r1 and r2 (inside the prism). RS is the emergent ray at angle i2.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

The angle between the emergent ray and incident ray is the deviation ‘d’.
In the quadrilateral AQMR,
∠A + ∠R = 180°
[since N1M are normal]
ie, ∠A + ∠M = 180°____(1)
In the ∆ QMR,
∴ r1 + r2 + ∠M = 180° ____(2)
Comparing eq (1) and eq (2)
r1 + r2 = ∠A ____(3)
From the ∆ QRT,
(i1 – r1) + (i2 – r2) = d
[since exterior angle equal sum of the opposite interior angles]
(i1 + i2) – (r1 + r2) = d
but, r1 + r2 = A
∴ (i1 + i2) – A = d
(i1 + i2) = d + A ____(4)
It is found that for a particular angle of incidence, the deviation is found to be minimum value ‘D’.
At the minimum deviation position,
i1 = i2 =i, r1 = r2 = r and d = D
Hence eq (3) can be written as,
r + r = A
or r = \(\frac{A}{2}\) ____(5)
Similarly eq (4) can be written as,
i + i = A + D
n = \(\frac{A + D}{2}\) ____(6)
Let n be the refractive index of the prism, then we can write,
n = \(\frac{sin i}{sin r}\) ____(7)
Substituting eq (5) and eq (6) in eq (7),
\(n=\frac{\sin \frac{A+D}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)
i – d curve:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 87

It is found that when the angle of incidence increases deviation (d) decreases and reaches a minimum value and then increases. This minimum value of the angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation.

3. Refracted ray is parallel to base
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 88

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 10.
Refraction of a ray of light at a spherical surface separating two media having refractive indices n1 and n2 is shown in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 89

  1. Which of the two media is more denser?
  2. In the figure, show that\(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{1}}{\mathrm{OA}}+\frac{\mathrm{n}_{2}}{\mathrm{AI}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{2}-\mathrm{n}_{1}}{\mathrm{AC}}\).
  3. Using the above relation arrive at the thin lens formula.
  4. An object is placed on the principal axis of a convex lens at a distance 8 cm from it. Find the magnification of the image if the focal length of the lens is 4 cm.

Answer:
1. Refractive index of medium 2 is greater than medium 1.

2. Refraction at a spherical surface
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 90
Consider a convex surface XY, which separates two media having refractive indices n1 and n2. Let C be the centre of curvature and P be the pole. Let an object is placed at ‘O’, at a distance ‘u’ from the pole.

I is the real image of the object at a distance V from the surface. OA is the incident ray at angle ‘i’ and Al is the refracted ray at an angle ‘r’. OP is the ray incident normally. So it passes without any deviation. From snell’s law,

\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
If ‘i’ and ‘r’ are small, then sin i » i and sin r » r.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 91
n1i = n2r ……….(1)
From the Δ OAC, exterior angle = sum of the interior opposite angles
i-e., i = α + θ ………(2)
Similarly, from Δ IAC,
α = r + β
r = α – β……..(3)
Substituting the values of eq(2) and eq(3)in eqn. (1) we get,
n1(α + θ) = n2(α – β)
n1α + n1β = n2α – n2β
n1θ + n2β = n2α – n1α
n1θ + n2β = (n2 – n1)α ………….(4)
From OAP, we can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 92

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
From IAP, β = \(\frac{\mathrm{AP}}{\mathrm{PI}}\), From CAP, a= \(\frac{\mathrm{AP}}{\mathrm{PC}}\)
Substituting θ, β, and α in equation (4) we get,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 93
According to New Cartesian sign convection, we can write,
OP=-u, PI = +v and PC = R
Substituting these values, we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 94
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 95
Case -1:
If the first medium is air, n1 = 1, and n2 = n,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 96

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

3. Consider a thin lens of refractive index n2 formed by the spherical surfaces ABC and ADC. Let the lens is kept in a medium of refractive index n1. Let an object ‘O’ is placed in the medium of refractive index n1 Hence the incident ray OM is in the medium of refractive index n1 and the refracted ray MN is in the medium of refractive index n1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 97
The spherical surface ABC (radius of curvature R1) forms the image at I1 Let ‘u’ be the object distance and ‘v1’ be the image distance.
Then we can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 98
This image I1 will act as the virtual object for the surface ADC and forms the image at v.
Then we can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 99
Dividing throughout by n1, we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 100
if the lens is kept in air, \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\) = n
So the above equation can be written as,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 101
From the definition of the lens, we can take, when
U = ∞, f = v
Substituting these values in the eq (3), we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 102

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
This is lens maker’s formula
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 103
For convex lens,
f = +ve, R1 = +ve, R2 = – ve
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 104
For concave lens,
f = -ve, R1 = -ve, R2 = +ve
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 105
Lens formula From eq(4),
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 106

4. u = -8cm, f = +4cm
m = \(\frac{f}{f+u}=\frac{4}{4+-8}\)
m = -1.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 11.
Two lenses L1 and L2 are placed in contact as shown in figures. The focal length of each lens is 10cm

  1. What is power of L1
  2. What is power of L2
  3. What is effective focal length of combination
  4. “The power of convex is greater than that of concave and combination can act as a diverging lens”. Is this statement true in any situation? Explain?

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 107
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 108

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 109

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 110
The combination will act as plane glass.

4. This is true statement. If we place the above combination in a medium of refractive index greater than this condition.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

Question 12.
A lens of particular focal length is made from a given glass by adjusting radius of curvature. The formula applied in this case is lens maker’s formula
1. Write down lens maker’s formula
2. Derive lens maker’s formula considering refraction at a spherical surface
3. Explain the following facts based on lens maker’s formula

  • power of sun glasses is zero even though they are curved
  • if a lens is immersed in water focal length increases

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 126

2. Refraction by a lens:
Lens Maker’s Formula (for a thin lens): Consider a thin lens of refractive index n2 formed by the spherical surfaces ABC and ADC. Let the lens is kept in a medium of refractive index n1. Let an object ‘O’ is placed in the medium of refractive index n1. Hence the incident ray OM is in the medium of refractive index n1 and the refracted ray MN is in the medium of refractive index n2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 112
The spherical surface ABC (radius of curvature R,) forms the image at l1. Let ‘u’ be the object distance and ‘v1’ be the image distance.
Then we can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 113

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Adding eq (1) and eq (2) we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 114
Dividing throughout by n1, we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 115
if the lens is kept in air, \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\) = n
So the above equation can be written as,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 116
From the definition of the lens, we can take, when u = ∞, f = v
Substituting these values in the eq (3), we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 117
This is lens maker’s formula
\(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\) ____(5)
For convex lens.
f = +ve, R1 = +ve, R2 = – ve
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 118
For concave lens,
f = -ve, R1 = -ve, R2 = +ve
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 119

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Lens formula
From eq(4),
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 120
From eq(5)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 121
From these two equations, we get
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 122
Linear magnification :
If ho is the height of the object and hi is the height of the image, then linear magnification.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 123

3.
a. R1 = R, R2 = +R
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 124

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
power of lens, P = 0

b. We know
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments - 125
The above equation shows when n1 increases f decreases the refractive index of water is greater than air. Hence when we place a lens in water, focul length decreases.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium

Students can Download Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium Questions and Answers, Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium

Plus Two Economics Market Equilibrium One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Complete the statement given below. Free entry and of firms imply that the market price will always be equal to ……………
Answer:
Minimum average cost (P = Min. AC)

Question 2.
Choose the correct answer. The imposition of price ceiling below the equilibrium price leads to ……….
Answer:
Excess demand

Question 3.
Market equilibrium of a commodity shows,
(a) excess demand
(b) quantity demanded greater than quantity supplied
(c) quantity demanded equals quantity supplied
(d) excess supply
Answer:
(c) quantity demanded equals quantity supplied

Question 4.
When there is increase in demand, the demand curve.
(a) shifts reight ward
(b) shifts leftward
(c) shifts downward
(d) remains constant
Answer:
(a) shifts reight ward

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
The government imposing upper limit on the price of a good or service is called:
(a) price floor
(b) price ceiling
(c) equilibrium price
(d) fair price
Answer:
(b) price ceiling

Plus Two Economics Market Equilibrium Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
At what price – higher or lower than the equilibrium price, there will be excess demand?
Answer:
When the market price is lower than the equilibrium price, there will be excess demand.

Question 2.
Make pairs.
Price floor, below equilibrium price, above equilibrium price, price ceiling
Answer:

  • Price floor – above equilibrium price.
  • Price ceiling – below equilibrium price.

Question 3.
Point out the consequences of price ceiling.
Answer:

  1. Black marketing
  2. Malpractices by fair price shops
  3. Sale of inferior quality goods.

Question 4.
What do you mean by control price?
Answer:
Fixation of price of a commodity at a lower level than equilibrium price is called control price. Control price is determined to protect the interest of the consumers.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
Market equilibrium of apple is given below in the diagram below.

  1. Define market equilibrium
  2. Find out the market price and equilibrium quantity

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img1
Answer:

  1. market equilibrium is a situation where quantity demanded is exactly equal to the quantity supplied.
  2. The price of apple is ₹40 and the equilibrium quantity is 30kg.

Plus Two Economics Market Equilibrium Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following.

AB
Price lower than equilibrium priceExcess demand
Equilibrium priceExcess supply
Price higher than equilibrium priceDemand = Supply

Answer:

AB
Price lowerthan equilibrium priceExcess supply
Equilibrium priceDemand = Supply
Price higher than equilibrium priceExcess demand

Question 2.
The demand function and supply function of a product are given as qD = 60 – P for 0 = P = 60 qS = 30 + P for P > 10 Calculate equilibrium price.
Answer:
The demand and supply functions are given as
qD= 60 – P for 0 = P = 60
qS = 30 + P for P > 10
Equilibrium price is considered as the price at which quantity demanded is exactly equal to quantity supplied. Therefore we get.
60 – P = 30 + P
60-30 = 2 P
30 = 2P
P = 30/2 = 15
Therefore equilibrium price is ₹15.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 3.
Complete the following statements.

  1. Long-run price under perfect competition will be equal to ……….
  2. Minimum price fixed by government for a product is known as ……….
  3. Maximum price fixed by government for a product is known as ………

Answer:

  1. average cost
  2. floor price
  3. price ceiling

Question 4.
Demand curve for labour is downward sloping. Explain
Answer:
Demand curve for labour is downward sloping indicating that more and more labour is demanded at lower wages. This is due to the operation of declining marginal productivity of labour. Marginal productivity of labodr declines due to the operation of diminishing returns. That is why the demand curve for labour slopes downward.

Question 5.
The market demand function and market supply functions are given as, Find the equilibrium price and equilibrium quantity.
qD = 200 – P for 0 = P = 200
qS = 120 + P for P > 10
Answer:
We find equilibrium price by equating market demand function and market supply functions as shown below.
qD = qS
200-P = 120 + P
2P = 80
P = 80/2 = 40
Therefore equilibrium price is ₹40. Equilibrium quantity is obtained by substituting the equilibrium price into either the demand or supply function equations. Applying the value of price ₹40 in demand equation we have.
qD= 200 – P
qD =200 – 40 = 160
Therefore equilibrium price is ₹40 and equilibrium quantity is 160.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
Prepare a note on market equilibrium.
Answer:
Equilibrium is defined as a situation where the plans of all consumers and firms in the market match and the market dears. In equilibrium, the aggregate quantity that all firms wish to sell equals the quantity that all the consumers in the market wish to buy; in other words, market supply equals market demand. The price at which equilibrium is reached is called equilibrium price and the quantity bought and sold at this price is called equilibrium quantity.

Therefore, qD (P*) = qS (P*) where P* denotes the equilibrium price and qD (P*) and qS (P*) denote the market demand and market supply of the commodity respectively at price P*

Question 7.
Suppose the demand and supply functions of commodity X are given by, Qd = 500 + 3P and Qs = 700 – P Qd = 500 + 3P Qs = 700 – P Find out the equilibrium price and quantity demanded and supplied.
Answer:
Equilibrium price and quantity can be determined by equating the demand and supply functions
Qd = Qs
500 + 3P = 700 – P
4P = 200
\(P=\frac{200}{4}=50\)
Equilibrium price is ₹50. Applying the price in the demand function, we get
500 + 3 × 50
500 + 150 =650
Therefore, equilibrium price is ₹50 and quantity is 650.
Qd = Qs
500 + 3P = 700 – P
4P = 200
\(P=\frac{200}{4}=50\)
Qd = 500 + 3 × 50
= 500 + 150 = 650

Question 8.
The diagram below illustrates the supply and demand for television sets. The original demand curve is D2
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img2
Using the diagram, state the new demand curve (D1 or D3) which will apply after each of the following changes taken place. (The same answer may be used more than once)

  1. A successful advertising campaign for television sets occurs
  2. Income decreases
  3. An increase in the population

Answer:

  1. Demand increases (D2 curve shifts right to D3)
  2. Demand decreases (D2 curve shifts left to D1)
  3. Demand increases (D1 curve shifts right to D3)

HSSLive.Guru

Question 9.
Calculate equilibrium price and quantity based on the following information.
qd= 400 – P (1)
qs= 240 + 3 (p – 4) (2)
Answer:
At equilibrium,
qd = qs
Putting the values,
400 – p = 240 + 3(p – 4)
400 – p = 240 + 3p – 12
400-240 + 12 = 3p + p
172 = 4p
\(p=\frac{172}{4}\)
p =43
Putting p = 43 in the first equation, we get,
qd =400 – 43 = 357 Therefore, equilibrium price = 43 and
equilibrium quantity is = 357 units

Question 10.
The diagram shows relationship between two commodities A and B.

  1. Identify the commodities A and B
  2. Explain what happens to the price and quantity demanded of A when the price of A falls.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img3
Answer:

  1. A and B are substitutes.
  2. When the price of A falls people will demand more A. So the demand for B will fall. That will result in a decrease in the price of B.

Question 11.
The diagram below shows one of the government intervention programmes in the market.

  1. Identify the programme and calculate the excess supply.
  2. Explain how the government is monitoring the higher price fixed.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img4
Answer:
1. Minimum price/floor price, 40 unit excess supply.

2. The government announces the minimum price above the market price. As a result of this intervention there occurs excess supply in the market. The government has to remove the excess from the market to maintain the price. So the government store the excess supply in the warehouses and redistribute it at the time of shortage.

Question 12.
Under perfect competition, a market for a good is in equilibrium. There is simultaneous “decrease” both in demand and supply, but there is no change in market price. Explain with the help of a diagram how it is possible.
Answer:
The decrease in demand and supply is the same, and hence the price remain the same. Shows this by drawing appropriate diagram
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img5

HSSLive.Guru

Question 13.
The diagrams below indicate four possible shifts in demand or in supply that could happen in particular markets. Relate each of the events described below to one of them. Also, give reason for the shift.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img6

  1. How does the lorry strike in Karnataka and Tamil Nadu affect the market for vegetables in Kerala?
  2. People become aware of the fact that Birds Eye Chilly is very much helpful to prevent Cholesterol. What happens to the market for Birds Eye Chilly?
  3. How do you think the rising income affect the market for fish?
  4. A new technique is discovered for manufacturing computer that greatly lowers their production cost. What happens to the market for computers?

Answer:

  1. figure C, supply falls and price rises.
  2. figure A, demand increases and price rises.
  3. figure B, demand increases and price rises.
  4. figure D, supply increases and price falls.

Plus Two Economics Market Equilibrium Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Mention the impact of the following.

  1. Imposition of price ceiling below equilibrium price
  2. Imposition of price floor above the equilibrium price

Answer:

  1. Imposition of price ceiling below equilibrium price leads to excess demand.
  2. Imposition of price floor above the equilibrium price leads to an excess supply

Question 2.
Complete the following table to show the impact of simultaneous shifts of demand and supply on equilibrium price and quantity.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img7
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img8

HSSLive.Guru

Question 3.
What will happen if the price prevailing in the market is?

  1. above the equilibrium price
  2. below the equilibrium price.

Answer:
1. If the price prevailing in the market is above equilibrium price, supply will exceed demand. Under such a situation some firms will not be able to sell their desired quantity; so they will lower their price. All other things remaining constant as price falls quantity demanded rises quantity supplied falls, and finally equilibrium price P* will be restored. At P* quantity demanded will be equal to quantity supplied.

2. If the price prevailing in the market is above equilibrium price, demand will exceed supply. Under such a situation some consumers will be ready to pay more prices to get the commodity. This will tend to increase the price. All other things remaining constant as price rises quantity demanded falls, quantity supplied rises, and finally, equilibrium price P* will be restored. At P* quantity demanded will be equal to quantity supplied.

Question 4.
Draw distinction between floor pricing and price ceiling.
Answer:
Floor price means minimum price. Floor price is fixed to protect producers like farmers from price crashes. It ensures a remunerative price to producers. In India, floor prices are fixed for a variety of agricultural commodities like paddy, wheat, coconut, rubber etc.

On the other hand, price ceiling mean maximum price. It is the maximum price fixed by the government. The aim of price ceiling is to protect consumers. Government fixes price ceiling for essential products and medicines to protect the interests of the consumers.

Question 5.

  1. Identify the situations depicted in the following figures in panel A and B.
  2. Why do such policies are followed and explain the impact of such policies?

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img9
Answer:
1. PANEL A – Price ceiling PANEL B –Price floor.

2. Price ceiling is fixed below equilibrium price. Imposition of price ceiling at ‘Pg’ gives rise to excess demand in the market price floor is fixed above equilibrium price. Imposition of floor price at ‘pg’ gives rise to excess supply.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
Mention the factors that cause shift in the supply curve.
Answer:
The factors that cause shift in the supply curves are:

  1. The change in the number of firms
  2. The change in the price of factor inputs
  3. Change in production technology
  4. Change in the prices of related goods
  5. Change in production tax.

Question 7.
How will a change in price of coffee affect the equilibrium price of tea? Explain the effect on equilibrium quantity through a diagram.
Answer:
Coffee and tea are substitutes. If prices of coffee are increased then its demand will decrease and demand tea would increase.lt will shift the demand curve of tea upwards. The equilibrium price and quantity will increase. This is shown in the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img10
In the diagram, when the price of coffee increased then the demand for tea increases. This has resulted in equilibrium price and quantity of tea.

Question 8.
How is price determined in labour market?
Answer:
The price of labour is determined by the forces of demand and supply of labour. The households are the suppliers of labour and demand for labour comes from firms. Labour means the hours of work provided by labourers. The wage rate is determined at the intersection of the demand and supply curve of labour.

The firm being a profit maximiser will always employ labour up to the point where the extra cost it incurs for the last labour is equal to the additional benefit he earns from employment that labour. The extra cost of hiring one more labour is the wage rate. For each extra unit of labour, he gets a benefit equal to marginal revenue product of labour.

Thus firm employs labour up to a point where: W = MRPL Where MRPL = MR x MPL As long as MRPL is greater than the wage rate the firm will earn more profit by hiring one more labour and if at any level of labour employment MRPL is less than the wage rate the firm can increase here profit by reducing labour employed.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img11

Question 9.
Prepare a table showing differences between price ceiling and price floor.
Answer:

Price ceilingPrice floor
Upper limit set by the government for some commoditiesLower limit set by the government for some commodities
Imposed on essential goods such as wheat, rice etc.Agricultural goods, workers etc. are benefitted
To maintain price ceiling, fair price shops may be openedTo maintain price floor, government needs to buy the excess quantity supplied
Price lower than the equilibrium pricePrice higher than the equilibrium price
Creation of excess demandCreation of excess supply

HSSLive.Guru

Question 10.

  1. With the help of a diagram show how the wage rate is determind in a free market.
  2. Analyse the impact of an increased entrance of foreign migrant labourers into the labour market.

Answer:
1. The diagram below shows how the wage rate of labour in a free market is determined. DL is the demand for labour and SL is the supply of labour, ‘e’ is the point of equilibrium, ‘ow’ is the wage rate and ‘oq’ is the quantity of labours.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img12

2. When the foreign migrant labour enters into the labour market, the supply of labour will shift rightward and the wage rate will come down as shown in the figure. ‘ow’ is the original wage rate and ‘OQ’ is the original quantity of labour. ow1 is the new wage rate and OQ, is the new quantity of labourers.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img13

Question 11.
Suppose we have two equations, one for demand and other for supply.
Demand equation: Qxd = 100 – 10Px
Supply equation : Qxs = 60 + 10Px

  1. Calculate equilibrium price and quantity using the equations.
  2. Construct demand and supply schedules by assigning various prices. Obtain equilibrium price and quantity graphically.

Answer:
1. Equilibrium price =2, equilibrium quantity=80
2. Demand & supply schedules
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img14

HSSLive.Guru

Question 12.
Let us take market of commodity ‘X’, which is in equilibrium. Suppose demand for the commodity increases. Explain the chain of effects of this change till the market again reaches equilibrium. Use diagram.
Answer:
Increase in demand leads to disequilibrium-price in-creases – super profit – new firms enter the industry – or existing firms expand production – increase in output – supply increases – supply curve shifts – the process continue until price returns the to the equilibrium level. Draws the diagram, and explains the process.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img16

Plus Two Economics Market Equilibrium Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Observe the following table.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img17

  1. Find equilibrium price.
  2. Fill the fourth column
  3. Why ₹35 and ₹40 are not equilibrium prices?
  4. Product surplus drives prices up and shortage drives them down. Do you agree?
  5. Draw a diagram of the above table showing the equilibrium price determination

Answer:
1. The equilibrium price is ₹37. At this price both demand and supply are equal.
2.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img18
3. At ₹35, demand exceeds the supply causing a shortage in the market. At ₹40, supply exceeds demand causing surplus. Therefore, these prices are equilibrium prices.
4. No. I do not agree with this argument.
5.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img19

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
Discuss the impact of the factors mentioned below on equilibrium price and quantity.

  1. shift in demand to right
  2. shift in demand to left
  3. shift in supply to right
  4. shift in supply to left.

Answer:
1. When demand curve shifts to right (increase in demand), there will be increase in equilibrium price and increase in equilibrium quantity. This change is shown in the diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img20

2. When demand curve shift to left (decrease in demand), both equilibrium quantity and equilibrium price falls. This is shown in the diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img21

3. When supply curve shift to right (increase in supply), the equilibrium price deceases and the equilibrium quantity increases. This is given in the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img22

4. When supply curve shifts to left (decrease in supply), the equilibrium price increases and the equilibrium quantity decreases. This is given in the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img23

Question 3.
Suppose the demand and supply curves of salt are given by. qD = 1000 – P qS = 700 + 2P

  1. Find the equilibrium price and quantity
  2. Suppose that the price of input used to produce salt has increased so that the supply curve is qS = 400 + 2P How does the equilibrium price and quantity change? Does the change conform to your expectation?
  3. Suppose the government has imposed a tax of 3 per unit of salt. How does it affect the equilibrium price and quantity?

Answer:
1. equilibrium price and quantity
qD = 1000 – P
qS = 700 + 2P
For equilibrium
qD = qS
1000 – P = 700 + 2P
1000 – 700 = 3 P
3P = 300
P = 300/3 = 100
Put the value of P in supply equation
qS = 700 + 2P
qS = 700 + 2×100
qS =700 + 200 = 900
Therefore the equilibrium price = ? 100 and the equilibrium quantity is = 900 units

HSSLive.Guru

2. For equilibrium
qD = qS
1000 – P = 400 + 2P
1000 – 400 = 3P
600 = 3 P
P = 600 / 3 = 200
Put the value of P in demand equation
QD= 1000 – P
QD = 1000  – 200 = 800
Therefore the equilibrium price = ₹200 and the equilibrium quantity is = 800 units This change confirms to our expectations, i.e., rise in input prices raises prices and lowers supply.

3. qD= 1000 – P
qS= 700 + 2P
When ₹3 as tax is imposed on sale of salt the new demand and supply function will change
qD= 1000 – (P + 3)
qS= 700 + (2P +3)
In part A equilibrium price was ₹100 which goes up to ₹103 with imposition of tax
qD = 1000 – (100 + 3) = 1000 – 103 =897
qS = 700 + (2P + 3)
= 700 + 2(100 + 3)
= 700 + 2×103
= 700 + 206 = 906
qD < qS
Therefore, new price and quantity has to be adjusted.

Question 4.
The diagram below shows how the price of wheat is determined in a free market.
a. Show in a seperate diagram the changes on price and quantity demanded of wheat due to the following factors

  1. The price of fertilizers increases.
  2. The price of rice a substitute of wheat increases.

b. Assess the impact of an increased demand for wheat and an increase in its production.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img25
Answer:
a. price and quantity demanded of wheat.
1. When the price of fertilizers increases the supply of wheat decreases. Its price increases and the quantity falls.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img26
2. When the price of rice, a substitute of wheat increases people may switch to consume wheat, this will increase the demand for wheat. Its price will increase and quantity also will increase.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img27

b. When the demand for heat increases its demand curve will shift rightward. When production increases its supply curve will shift rightward as shown in the diagram below.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Market Equilibrium img28
Due to these shifts, the quantity will increase anyhow. But the effect on the price will be in different forms. The price may fall, will be constant or even may increase. Whether the price will increase, decrease or remain constant is determined by the respective shifts in demand and supply.

If both demand and supply shift in the same magnitude the price will be same. If the shift in the demand is more than the supply the price will increase. And if the shift in the supply is more than the shift in the demand the price will fall.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Students can Download Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Alkolic KOH is a specific reagent for
(a) dehydration
(b) dehalogenation
(c) dehydrohalogenation
(d) dehydrogenation
Answer:
(c) dehydrohalogenation

Question 2.
Chloroform is slowly oxidised by air in the presence of light to an extremely poisonous gas called ………………
Answer:
carbonyl chloride/phosgene

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 3.
Which of the following represents a gem di halide?
(a) ethylene dichloride
(b) 2,2-dichloropropane
(c) 1,3-dichloropropane
(d) 1,2-dichloropropane
Answer:
(b) 2,2-dichloropropane

Quesiton 4.
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes one mark q4 img 1 Here ‘A’ is
(a) phenol
(b) sodium phenoxide
(c) benzene
(d) cyclohexyl chloride
Answer:
(b) sodium phenoxide

Question 5.
There are _________ structural isomers of C4H9Br.
Answer:
Four

Question 6.
Name the insecticide prepared from chloral and chloro benzene.
Answer:
DDT

Question 7.
The reaction between arylhalide and alkylhalide in the presence of sodium and dry ether.
Answer:
Wurtz-Fittig reaction

Question 8.
Name the substance which is used as anaesthetic.
Answer:
Chloroform

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 9.
Name an alkyl magnesium halide.
Answer:
Methyl magnesium chloride (CH3MgCI) – Grignard reagent

Question 10.
Compounds in which the halogen atom is directly attached to an aromatic ring carbon.
Answer:
Aryl halides

Question 11.
Even though alkylhalides are polar in nature, they are insoluble in water. Comment on it.
Answer:
This is because alkylhalides can neither make or break hydrogen bonds with water molecules.

Question 12.
From the following select those compounds which are used for the preparation of alkyl halide?

NH3, SOCI2, Na, aq.KOH, HCI, alc.KOH, CH3-CH2-CI, anhyd.ZnCI2.

Answer:
SOCI2, HCI, and ZnCI2

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 13.
When (-) 2methyl butan-1-ol is heated with con. HCI +1-chloro-2 methyl butane is obtained. This reaction is an example of
(a) retension
(b) invission
(c) racemisation
(d) resolution
Answer:
(a) retension

Question 14.
If alkaline hydrolysis of a tertiary alkyl halide by aqeous alkali, if concentration of alkali is doubled then the reaction rate at constant temperature will be ___________
Answer:
will be tripled.

Question 15.
The organic compound used as feedstock in the synthesise of chlorofluorocarbon is ___________
Answer:
CCI4

Question 16.
DDT is prepared from _____________
Answer:
Chlorobenzene and B.H.C

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 17.
Chlorination of benzene in the presence of halogen is an example of ____________
Answer:
aromatic electrophilic substitution

Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the preparation of extra pure alkyl halide from ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
When ethyl alcohol is heated with thionyl chloride, chloroethane is obtained. Here the byproducts are in gaseous state and hence this method is used for the preparation of extra pure alkyl halide.
CH3-CH2-OH + SOCI2 → CH3CH2CI + HCI + SO2

Question 2.
A student was treating iodoform with silver nitrate and he got yellow precipitation. Then he used chloroform instead of Iodoform.

  1. Will he get the earlier result?
  2. Why?

Answer:

  1. No
  2. C-I bond in iodoform is weaker than C-CI bond of chloroform. So C-I bond of iodoform is easily broken to form yellow precipitate of AgI when heated with AgNO3 solution.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 3.

Choral, Sodium carbonate, Bleaching power, Iodine, Ethyl alcohol.

From the box, write the raw materials of chloroform and Iodoform.
Answer:
Chloroform – ethyl alcohol and bleaching powder Iodoform – Sodium carbonate, ethyl alcohol and iodine

Question 4.
During a class room discussion a student 1 argued: “When chlorobenzene is allowed to react with metallic sodium in the presence of dry ether medium, diphenyl is obtained”. Then student 2 countered: “This reaction will take place in the presence of ale. KOH”.

  1. Whom you will support?
  2. Name the reaction? Explain it.

Answer:

  1. Student 1
  2. Fittig reaction

When aryl halide is allowed to heat with sodium in dry ether medium, diaryl is obtained, or
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q4 img 1

Question 5.
Analyse the following statements:
Statement 1: Alkyl halides are polar compounds.
Statement 2: Alkyl halides are insoluble in water because alkyl halides are non-polar compounds. What is your opinion? Explain it.
Answer:
Even though alkylhalides are polar compounds, they are insoluble in water. Because they can neither form hydrogen bonds with water nor break the hydrogen bonds existing between water molecules.

Question 6.
Which of the following has the highest dipole moment?

  1. CH2CI2
  2. CHCI3
  3. CCI4

Answer:
Dipole moment of CH2CI2 (1.60 D) is the highest. The dipole moment of CCI4 is zero while that of CHCI3 is 1.03 D. The dipolement of CHCI3 is less than that of CH2CI2 because the bond dipole of third C-CI bond opposes the resultant of bond dipoles of the other two C-CI bonds.

Question 7.
A hydrocarbon C5H10 does not react with chlorine in dark but gives a single monochloro compound C5H9CI in bright sunlight. Identify the hydrocarbon.
Answer:
Since the hydrocarbon gives only one monochloro compound, it indicates that all the hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon are equivalent. Thus, the compound is cyclopentane.
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q7 img 2

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 8.
Which of the following has the highest dipole moment? CH2CI2, CHCI3, CCI4. Justify.
Answer:
The dipole moment of CH2CI2 (1.6 D) is the highest. The dipole moment of CCI4 is zero while that of CHCI3 is 1.03 D. The dipole moment of CHCI3 is less than that of CH2CI2 because the bond dipole of third C-CI bond opposes the resultant of bond dipoles of the other two C-CI bonds.

Question 9.
Which alkyl halide from the following pair would you expect to react more rapidly by SN2 reaction mechanism? Justify your answer. CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-Br or CH3-CH2-CH(Br)-CH3
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q9 img 3

Presence of bulky groups around carbon atoms induce an inhibitory effect. Bulky group hinders the approaching nucleophiles in SN2 mechanisam.

Question 10.
Explain the stereochemical aspects of SN1 and SN2 reactions selecting suitable example.
Answer:
SN1 reaction:
In the case of optically active alkyl halides, SN1 reactions are accompanied by racemisation. This is because the attack of the nucleophile may be accomplished from either side resulting in a mixture of products, one having the same configuration and the other having opposite configuration.
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q10 img 4
SN2 reaction:
In the case of optically active alkyl halides, there is inversion of configuration. This is because the nucleophile attaches itself on the side opposite to the one where the halogen atom is present
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q10 img 5

Question 11.
Arrange the following compounds in the order of reactivity towards SN2 displacement. 2-Bromo-2-methyl butane, 1-Bromopentane 2-Bromopentane
Answer:
1-Bromopentane > 2-Bromo-pentane > 2-Bromo-2- methyl butane

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 12.
What happens when methyl bromide is treated with sodium in presence of dry ether? Write the chemical equation and name the reaction.
Answer:
Ethane is formed.
Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes two mark q12 img 6
called Wurtz reaction.

Question 13.
Chloroform is stored in black coloured bottles. Why?
Answer:
In presence of sunlight chloroform undergoes oxidation to form carbonyl chloride (phosgene).

Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Raju heated the test tube containing ale. KOH and primary amine with one compound. A foul smell is obtained.

  1. What is the compound?
  2. Name the foul smelling product obtained.
  3. Name the reaction.

Answer:

  1. Chloroform
  2. Isocyanide/Carbyl amine
  3. Carbyl amine reaction/lsocyanide test

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 2.
Nitration is one of the ring substitution reactions.

  1. How it will be carried out?
  2. What are the products obtained when chloro-benzene is heated with the nitrating mixture?
  3. What is the difference if the same compound is heated with fuming H2SO4?

Answer:
1. By heating with nitrating mixture (mixture of conc.HN03 and conc.H2O4)

2. A mixture of 1-Chloro-2-nitrobenzene (minor product) and 1-Chloro-4-nitrobenzene (major product) is obtained.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 7

3. If chloro benzene is heated with fuming H2So4 sulphonation will take place resulting in the formation of a mixture of 2-Chlorobenzene sulphonic acid (minor product) and 4- Chlorobenzene sulphonic acid (major product).
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 8

Question 3.
Consider the reaction: RX + Mg → RMgX

  1. Identify the compound ‘RMgX’.
  2. Explain the reaction.

Answer:

  1. Grignard Reagent
  2. When alkyl halides are treated with magnesium in the presence of dry ether, alkyl magnesium halide is obtained.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 9

Question 4.
Chloroform kept in brown coloured bottles filled up to the neck.

  1. What is the reason for this?
  2. Few drops of 1% ethyl alcohol is added to chloroform to be kept for long. Give reason.

Answer:
1. In the presence of sunlight chloroform undergoes oxidation to form carbony chloride or phosgene, a highly poisonous gas.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 10
This reaction can be avoided by storing it in dark bottles, completely filled upto brim. The use of brown bottles cuts off active light radiations and filling upto brim keeps out air. So chloroform is kept in brown bottles.

2. Addition of a little ethanol fixes the toxic COCI2 as non-poisonous diethyl carbonate.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 5.
Fill in the blanks:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 11
Answer:

  1. CH3CH2I
  2. Ethyl Iodide
  3. CH3-CHBr-CH3
  4. 2-Bromopropane
  5. Iso-butyl chloride
  6. 1-Chloro-2-methylpropane

Question 6.
In a Chemistry class, teacher explained that when benzene diazonium chloride is allowed to react with cuprous chloride and HCI, Chloro benzene is obtained. Then teacher asked

  1. If we use copper powder instead of cuprous chloride. What will be the product?
  2. Write the name of the reaction.
  3. Write the equation which shows the reaction between benzene diazonium chloride with copper powder and HCI.

Answer:
1. Chlorobenzene is obtained.

2. Gattermann reaction.

3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 12

Question 7.
In a Lab, one student took a compound in test tube and he added iodine and alkali. He notices a yellow precipitate.

  1. Write the name of the test.
  2. Which type of compounds give this test?
  3. According to the above answer, ethyl alcohol or methyl alcohol, which one gives this test?

Answer:

  1. Iodoform test
  2. Iodoform test is given by those compounds which are having CH3CO – group or CH3CHOH group.
  3. Ethyl alcohol gives Iodoform test becuase it has CH3CHOH group.

Question 8.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 13
For the preparation of chlorobenzene, Nikhil wrote the equation ‘A’ and Nishanth wrote the equation ‘B’.

  1. Which of the above equation is correct? Why?
  2. Write the name of the reactions ‘A’ and ‘B’
  3. Explain any one reaction.

Answer:

    1. Both the reactions (A) and (B) are correct.
    2. (A) -Sandmeyer reaction (B) – Gattermann reaction
    3. Sandmeyer reaction – When benzene diazonium chloride is allowed to react with cuprous chloride and HCI, chlorobenzene is obtained, benzene diazonium chloride + cuprous chloride
      Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 37

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 9.
a. In the following pairs of compounds which would undergo SN2 reaction faster?
(CH3)3C-Brand CH3-CH2-Br
b. i) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH + SOCI2 → ……..
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 14
Answer:
a. CH3CH2Br. SN2 reaction is faster in the case of primary alkyl halides since the transition state is more stable.
b. i) CH3CH2CH2CI
ii) CH3-CH2 -CH2 – CH2Br (Anti-Markownikoff’s addition)

Question 10.

  1. Nucleophilic substitution of haloalkane takes place through two different mechanisms, SN1 and SN2. Why do inversion of configuration take place in SN2?
  2. What is racemic mixture?
  3. Comment on the optical activity of recemic mixture.

Answer:

  1. is because the nucleophile attaches itself on the side opposite to the one where the halogen atom is present.
  2. Equimolar mixture of ‘d’ and T forms of an optically active compound is called racemic mixture.
  3. Racemic mixture is optically inactive due to external compensation. A mixture containing two enantiomers in equal proportions will have zero optical rotation, as the rotation due to one isomer will be cancelled by the rotation due to the other isomer.

Question 11.
Write equations for the preparation of 1-iodobutane from
i) 1 – butanol
ii) 1 – chlorobutane
iii) but -1- ene
Answer:
i) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH+ HI → CH3CH2CH2CH2I + H2O
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 15

Question 12.
Which compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in SN2 reaction with – OH?

  1. CH3Br or CH3I
  2. (CH3)3CCI or CH3CI

Answer:

  1. CH3I will react faster because C-I bond undergoes cleavage more easily as compared to C-Br bond.
  2. CH3CI will react faster because in it the carbon carrying halogen is sterically less hindered.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 13.
Identify the product X, Y, and Z in the following reaction.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 16
Answer:

  • X = CH3CH2CI
  • Y = CH3CH2CN
  • Z = CH3CH2CONH2

Question 14.
Identify the compounds X, Y, and Z in the following.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 17
Answer:

  • X = CH3 – CH2Br
  • Y = CH3CH2OH
  • Z = CHI3

Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
CH3-CH = CH2 + HCI

  1. What are the possible products?
  2. Of these which one is the major product?
  3. Name the rule which helps you to answer the above question.
  4. Explain the rule.

Answer:
1.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 18

2. 2-Chloropropane is major.
3. Markownikoffs rule.
4. When a hydrogen halide is added to an unsymmetrical alkenethe halogen atom of alkyl halide will go to double-bonded carbon atom containing lesser number of hydrogen atom.

Question 2.
Two compounds are given Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 19

  1. What is the difference between these two compounds?
  2. Write the name of reaction they undergo and explain it.

Answer:

  1. 1st compound is cyanide. 2nd compound is isocyanide
  2. Nucleophilic substitution reactions.

The reactions in which a stronger nucleophile substitutes or displaces a weaker nucleophile are called nucleophilic substitution reactions.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 20

  1. Name ‘A’.
  2. What is the role of ‘A’?
  3. Name the product obtained.
  4. What is this reaction called?

Answer:

  1. Dry ether
  2. Dry ether is used to prevent explosion
  3. Diphenyl
  4. Fittig reaction

Question 4.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 21
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 22
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 23

Question 5.
a) Haloalkanes give β-elimination.
i) Prepare CH2 = CH2 from CH3 – CH2X and alchoholic KOH.
ii) Give the major product of the β-elimination of
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 24
Name the related rule.

b) In the following pairs of halogen compounds which would undergo SN2 reaction faster? Justify.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 25
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 26
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 27
It is primary halide and therefore undergoes SN2 reaction faster.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 28
An iodide is a better leaving group because of its large size. It will be released at a faster rate in the presence of attacking nucleophile.

Question 6.

  1. Which among the following compounds undergo SN1 substitution easily – 3° or 1° alkyl halide? Give reason. Justify.
  2. Grignard reagents should be prepared under anhydrous conditions. Give reason.

Answer:

  1. 3°- alkyl halide. Because the 3° carbocation is more stable than a 1° carbocation.
  2. Grignard reagents react with water and get decomposed (hydrolysed). Hence they should be prepared under anhydrous conditions.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 7.
a. In the following pair of halogen compounds which undergo SN2 reactions faster.

  1. C6H2 – CH2 – CI and C6 H3 -CI
  2. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CI and CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – I

b.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 29

Answer:
a. Undergo SN2 reactions faster

  1. C6H5CH2CI
  2. CH3 -CH2 -CH2 -I (R-I bond is weaker than R-CI bond)

b.

i) CH3 -CH2 -CH2 -CH2 Br
ii) CH3-CH2-CN

Question 8.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 30 Complete the reaction.
b) R- CH2– CI, R2CHCI, R3CCI. Arrange these alkylhalide in the order of reactivity towards SN1 and SN2 mechanism.

Answer:

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 31

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 9.
Write the isomers of compound having molecular formula C4H9Br.
Answer:
For the molecular formula C4H9Br four isomers are possible.
(i) CH3-CH2 – CH2 – CH3 (1-Bromobutane)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 32

Plus Two Chemistry Haloalkanes and Haloarenes NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A hydrocarbon C5H10 does not react with chlorine in dark but gives a single monochloro compound C5H10CI in bright sunlight. Identify the hydrocarbon.
Answer:
Since the hydrocarbon gives only one monochloro compound, it indicates that all the hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon are equivalent. Thus, the compound is cyclopentane.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 33

Question 2.
Write the isomers of compound having molecular formula C4H9Br.
Answer:
For the molecular formula C4H9Br four isomers are possible.
(i) CH3-CH2 – CH2 – CH3 (1-Bromobutane)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 34

Question 3.
Write equations for the preparation of 1-iodobutane from
i) 1 – butanol
ii) 1 – chlorobutane
iii) but – 1 – ene
Answer:
i) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH+ HI → CH3CH2CH2CH2I + H2O
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 35

Question 4.
Which compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in SN2 reaction with OH?
Answer:

  • CH3I will react faster because C-I bond undergoes cleavage more easily as compared to C-Br bond.
  • CH3CI will react faster because in it the carbon carrying halogen is sterically less hindered.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 5.
Out of C6H5CH2CI and C6H5CHCIC6H5which is more easily hydrolysed by aqueous KOH?
Answer:
C6H5CH2CIC6H5 is more easily hdrolysed because in this case the reaction proceeds through more stable intermediate carbocation.

The intermediate carbocation in this case is stabilised by resonance effect of two phenyl groups whereas in the other case it is stabilised by resonance effect of only one phenyl group.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 36

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Students can Download Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Waves NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What physical quantity is the same for X-rays of wavelength 10-10, red light of wavelength 6800 Å and radio waves of wavelength 500m?
Answer:
The speed in vacuum is the same for all.
c = 3 × 108ms-1

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 2.
A plane electromagnetic wave travels in vacuum along z-direction. What can you say about the directions of its electric and magnetic field vectors? If the frequency of the wave is 30 MHz, what is its wavelength?
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{E}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are in x-y plane and are mutually perpendicular. Given v = 30 MHz = 30 × 106 Hz, c = 3 × 108ms-1.
∴ \(\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{30 \times 10^{6}}\) = 10m.

Question 3.
A radio can tune into any station in the 7.5 MHz to 12 MHz band. What is the corresponding wavelength band?
Answer:
For v1 = 7.5 MHz = 7.5 × 106 Hz
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 1
For v2 = 12 MHz = 12 × 106 Hz
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 2
So the wavelength band: 40m – 25m.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 4.
Suppose that the electric field part of an electromagnetic wave in vacuum is E = {(3.1N/C) cos [(1.8 rad/m) y + (5.4 × 106 rad s-1t] \(\hat{i}\)

  1. What is the direction of propagation?
  2. What is the wavelength X?
  3. What is the frequency v?
  4. What is the amplitude of the magnetic field part of the wave?
  5. Write an expression for the magnetic field part of the wave.

Answer:

  1. \(-\hat{j}\)
  2. λ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{k}=\frac{2 \times 3.14}{1.8}\) = 3.48 = 3.5m
  3. v = C/λ = 3 × 108/ 3.5 = 85.7 × 106 = 86 MHz.
  4. B0 = \(\frac{E_{0}}{c}=\frac{31}{3 \times 10^{8}}\) = 10 × 10-8T = 100nT.
  5. 100nT) cos (1.8 rad/m) y + (5.4 × 106 rad/s)t \(\hat{k}\)

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Waves One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The structure of solids is investigated by using
(a) cosmic rays
(b) X-rays
(c) y-rays
(d) infra-red radiations
Answer:
(b) X-rays

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 2.
Wavelength of light of frequency 100Hz.
(a) 4 × 106m
(b) 3 × 106m
(c) 2 × 1o6m
(d) 5 × 10-5m
Answer:
(b) 3 × 106m
λ = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{100}\) = 3 × 106m.

Question 3.
What is the biological importance of ozone layer
(a) It stops ultraviolet rays
(b) ozone layer reduces green house effect
(c) ozone layer reflects radio waves
(d) ozone layer controls O2/H2 ratio in atmosphere
Answer:
(a) It stops ultraviolet rays
The ozone layer absorbs the harmful ultraviolet rays coming from sun.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 4.
Pick the odd one out from the following x-rays, visible light, matter waves, radio waves.
Answer:
Matter waves, (matter-wave is not a em wave).

Question 5.
What physical quantity is the same for X-rays of wavelength 10-10, red light of wavelength 6800 Å and radio waves of wavelength 500m?
Answer:
The speed in vacuum is the same for all.
c = 3 × 108ms-1.

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Waves Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
State whether True or False.

  1. Electromagnetic waves propagate in the direction of electric field.
  2. For an electromagnetic wave the ratio of E to B is equal to speed of light.
  3. In an electromagnetic wave, electric field leads by π/2.
  4. Electromagnetic waves can be produced by accelerating electric charge.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. False
  4. True

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Waves Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following:
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves Three Questions and Answers 3
Answer:

  • Radiowave – accelerated motion of charges in wires – cellular phones.
  • Infrared waves – Hot bodies and molecule – Green house effect.
  • X-rays – High energy electrons – diagnostic purpose
  • Gama-rays – Radio active nuclei – destroy cancer cells.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Waves Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In an electro magnetic wave electric and magnetic field vectors are given by E = 120 sin (ωt + kz) i, B = 40 × 10-8sin (ωt +kz)j

  1. What is the direction of propagation of electro magnetic wave?
  2. Determine the ratio of amplitude of electric field to magnetic field in the case of the above em wave?
  3. How can you relate the above ratio with m0 and e0.

Answer:

  1. A direction or perpendicular to the direction of variation of electric field and magnetic field, ie.z direction.
  2. \(\frac{E_{0}}{B_{0}}=\frac{120}{40 \times 10^{-8}}\) = 3 × 108m/s.
  3. \(\frac{E_{0}}{B_{0}}=\sqrt{\frac{1}{\mu_{0} \varepsilon_{0}}}\) = C.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 2.
Match the following.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves Four Questions and Answers 4
Answer:

  • γ-ray – Radioactivity – Nucleus
  • X-ray – Diagnosis- Photon emission by fast moving e’s
  • uv-ray- Sunburn – Electronicde excitation
  • Microwave – Remote sensing – Oscillating current.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 3.
The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given by B = 2 × 10-7 sin (0.5 × 103x + 1.5 × 1011t)

  1. What is the maximum amplitude of this magnetic field?
  2. What is wave length and frequency?
  3. If this electro magnetic move in z-direction. Write the equation of it’s electric field.

Answer:
1. 2 × 10-7.

2. Comparing with standard equation
B = Bx Sin (kx + ωt)
we get, kx = 0.5 × 103x.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves Four Questions and Answers 5
m = 12.56 × 10-3m
ω = 1.5 × 1011, 2πf = 1.5 × 1011
f = 2.3 × 1011hz

3. Amplitude E0 = B0 C
= 2 × 10-7 × 3 × 108 = 60 N/C
If magnetic field vibrate in x direction,
then Ey = 60 sin (0.5 × 103z + 1.5 × 1011t).

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 4.
The diagram shows the main regions of the electro magnetic spectrum.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Waves Four Questions and Answers 6

  1. Write the names of the blank regions.
  2. Which radiation shown in the table has the shortest wavelength?
  3. Which ray among these are responsible for green house effect? Explain green house effect.

Answer:
1. Ultra violet, Infrared.

2. Gamma-ray

3. Infrared
Earth is heated by infrared radiations from the sun. At the same time earth radiates longer wavelength to the space. This radiation (outgoing) of longer wavelength is reflected back by CO2 and other gases.

Hence radiation (from earth) can’t escape from earth’s surface. Thus the temperature at earth’s surface increases. This phenomenon is called Green house effect.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Electro Magnetic Waves

Question 5.

  1. Sun is a very powerful source of ultraviolet rays. But we do not receive much ultraviolet rays on the surface of the earth. Why?
  2. The electric field of an ultraviolet ray is given by E = 60 sin (0.5 × 103 – 1.5 × 1011t) What is the amplitude of the magnetic field vector in the ultraviolet ray?

Answer:
1. Ozone prevents the UV ray.

2. \(B=\frac{E}{C}=\frac{60}{3 \times 10^{8}}\)
= 2 × 10-7wb/m2.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition

Students can Download Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition Questions and Answers, Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition

Plus Two Economics The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
TR curve under perfect competition passes through the origin. Do you agree?
Answer:
Yes, I agree.

Question 2.
Pick the odd one out.

  1. Homogeneous products, free entry, and exit, price maker.
  2. Homogeneous product, freedom of entry and exit, large number of buyers and sellers, product differentiation.
  3. MC = MR, MR = AFC, MC cuts MR from below, P = AC.

Answer:

  1. Price maker. Others are features of perfect competition.
  2. Product differentiation. Others are features of perfect competition.
  3. MR = AFC. Others are conditions for firm’s equilibrium under perfect competition.

Question 3.
Pick out the odd one and justify it.
Free entry, profit maximization, perfect knowledge, price discrimination.
Answer:
Price discrimination. Others are features of perfect competition.

Question 4.
Which of the following represents normal profit?
(a) MR = MC
(b) AR = AC
(c) TR > TC
(d) AR < AC
Answer:
(b) AR = AC

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
Firm is price taker under:
(a) perfect competition
(b) monopoly
(c) monopolistic competition
(d) duopoly
Answer:
(a) perfect competition Question

6. Shut down point occurs at:
(a) rising part of
(b) following part of AVC
(c) minimum point AVC
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) minimum point AVC

Question 7.
A firm is able to sell any quantity of the good at a given price. The firm’s marginal revenue will be
(a) Greater than AR
(b) Less than AR
(c) Equal to AR
(d) Zero
Answer:
(c) Equal to AR

Question 8.
The short run shut-down point of a firm in a perfectly competitive firm is.
(a) P = AVC
(b) P = AC
(c) P > AVC
(d) P < AVC
Answer:
(a) P = AVC

HSSLive.Guru

Question 9.
If P exceeds AVC but is smaller than AC at the best level of output, the firm in perfect competition is
(a) Making profit
(b) Minimizing losses in the short run
(c) Incurring a loss and should stop producing
(d) Breaking even
Answer:
(b) Minimizing losses in the short run

Plus Two Economics The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A firm cannot make supernormal profit in the long run under perfect competition. Do you agree? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
Yes, I do agree to the statement that a firm cannot make supernormal profit in the long run under perfect competition. This is because freedom of entry will prevent supernormal profit in the long run.

Question 2.
Define ‘Break even point’.
Answer:
The point on the supply curve at which a firm earns normal profit is called the break even point. The point of minimum average cost at which the supply curve cuts the LRAC curve is, therefore, the break-even point of a firm.

Question 3.
Examine the difference between the short run price and the long run price of a firm under perfect competition.
Answer:
There is a major difference between the short run and long run price under perfect competition. In the short run, price should be equal to or greater than the minimum AVC. If the price falls below this level, the firm will shut down production. On the other hand, the long run price should be equal to or greater than the minimum AC. Below this level, the firm will shut down production.

Question 4.
What is the supply curve the firm in the long run?
Answer:
In the long run, a firm will produce output only when its price is at least equal to the average cost of production. Therefore, average cost curve represents the supply curve of the firm.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
How does technological progress affect the supply curve of the firm?
Answer:
The supply curve of the firm slopes upward from left to right indicating a direct relationship between price and quantity supplied. When there is technological progress, it will affect the supply. Now the firm will be in a position to produce and supply more output at the same price. Therefore the supply curve will shift towards the right side.

Question 6.
How does an increase in the number of firms in a market affect the market supply curve?
Answer:
As the number of firms changes the market supply curve shifts. When the number of firms increases the market supply curve shifts to the right. On the other hand, if the number of firms decreases, the market supply curve shifts to the left.

Question 7.
Define ‘shut down point’
Answer:
Shut down point refers to a situation where average revenue is equal to average variable cost. If the price fails to cover even average variable cost, firm will stop its production.

Question 8.
Make pairs:
Perfect competition, price marker, oligopoly, Cournot model, price taker, monopoly.
Answer:

  • Perfect competition – price taker
  • Monopoly – price maker
  • Oligopoly – Cournot model

Question 9.
The diagram below shows two curves faced by a firm under perfect competition. Name them.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img1
Answer:

  1. Total revenue curve
  2. Average/Marginal revenue curve

Question 10.
Choose the correct answer from the given multiple choices.
a. Identify the equilibrium condition of a firm under perfect competition.

  1. AC=MR, & AC cuts MR from above.
  2. MC=MR, & AC cuts MR from below.
  3. AC=MR, & MC cuts MR from below.
  4. MC=MR, &MC cuts MR from above.
  5. MC=MR, & MC cuts MR from below.

b. The demand for the product of a firm is perfectly elastic in one of the following markets.
Identify the market.

  1. monopoly
  2. monopolistic competition
  3. perfect competition
  4. monopsony
  5. oligopoly

Answer:
a. 5
b. 3

Plus Two Economics The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following.

AB
Perfect competitionTR-TC
TRMinimum point of AVC
ProfitPrice taker
Shutdown pointPrice x Quantity
Supply curve of the firmRise in-unit tax
Shift of supply curveRising portion of SMC

Answer:

AB
Perfect competitionPrice taker
TRPrice x Quantity
ProfitTR-TC
Shutdown pointMinimum point of AVC
Supply curve of the firmRising portion of SMC
Shift of supply curveRise in-unit tax

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
A firm maximizes profit when the difference between total revenue and total cost is the maximum. Profit is maximized when certain conditions are satisfied. Do you agree?
Answer:
Yes.
A firm maximizes profit when the following three conditions are satisfied.

  1. The market price, p, is equal to the marginal cost.
  2. The marginal cost is nondecreasing.
  3. In the short run, the market price must be greater than or equal to the average variable cost. In the long run, the market price must be grater than or equal to the average cost.

Question 3.
Write the economic terms

  1. Cost vary with output
  2. Total Cost divided by quantity
  3. TRn – TRn-1
  4. TR = TC point
  5. A case where an increase in all the inputs lead to a just proportionate increase in output.

Answer:

  1. Variable cost
  2. Average cost
  3. Marginal revenue
  4. Breakeven point
  5. Constant returns

Question 4.
Perfect competition does not exist in the real world. Do you agree? Substantiate your view.
Answer:
Yes, I agree to the statement that in the real world perfect competition does not exist.

This is because, it is rare to find the features of perfect competition especially the features like perfect knowledge, perfect mobility of factors and product, etc. What we really find in the world is monopolistic competition which is a mix of perfect competition and monopoly.

Question 5.
A firm’s supply curve in the short run is the rising part of the SMC curve. Why?
Answer:
A firm under perfect competition in the short run will start supplying only if the price is equal to or greater than the short run average variable cost. Therefore, the rising part of the short run marginal cost which begins with the minimum SAVC is the supply curve of the firm in the short run.

Question 6.
Imagine that S° is the original supply curve of the firm. If a unit tax is imposed, what happens to the supply curve? Show the change in a diagram.
Answer:
If a unit tax is imposed, firm’s long run supply curve shifts to the left. It is shown in the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img2

Question 7.
Fill in the blanks.

  1. Long run price under perfect competition will be equal to ……………….
  2. Maximum price fixed for a product by the government is called ………..
  3. The point denoted by the minimum of AVC is called …………

Answer:

  1. Average cost
  2. Price ceiling
  3. Shutdown point

HSSLive.Guru

Question 8.
Choose the appropriate answer.
a. A fall in supply caused by a fall in price is known as:

  1. Contraction of supply
  2. Expansion of supply
  3. Increase in supply ‘

b. When supply curve is a vertical straight line, supply is

  1. Perfectly elastic
  2. Perfectly inelastic
  3. Unitary elastic

c. The price under perfect competition. short run should be at least equal to

  1. Short run MC
  2. Short run AC
  3. Short run AVC

Answer:
a. Contraction of supply
b. Perfectly inelastic
c. Short run AVC

Question 9.
List the factors affecting elasticity of supply.
Answer:
The factors affecting elasticity of supply are

  1. nature of the commodity
  2. cost of production
  3. time period
  4. technique of production

Question 10.
Observe the following figures and answer the questions.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img3

  1. Point out the elasticities on the above supply curves.
  2. Which method is applied here?

Answer:
1. supply curves:

  • S1 Elastic supply
  • S2 Unitary elastic supply
  • S3 Inelastic supply

2. Geometric method is applied here.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 11.

  1. Identify the market structure that is represented by their curve in the diagram.
  2. Explain why the AR curve is horizontal

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img4
Answer:
1. Perfect competition

2. It is assumed that under perfect competition compared to the industry the share of each firm is meager. No firm can influence the market supply. So even if a firm doubles the quantity supplied the market supply will not change. The price remains the same. So theARorthe demand curve is horizontal.

Question 12.
Information about a firm is given in the following
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img5
Find out the equilibrium level of output in terms of MC & MR. Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img6
Equilibrium quantity is 4. At this level of output MC = MR & MC cuts MR from below.

Question 13.
A firm can sell any quantity of the output it produces at a given price. If so, what is the behaviour of marginal revenue and average revenue? Draw the two curves in a single diagram.
Answer:
The demand curve facing the firm is perfectly elastic. At this condition AR=MR=Price
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img7

Plus Two Economics The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following table
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img8

  1. At which production level there will be no profit or loss to the producer?
  2. Comment on the profit and loss conditions as TC 1000 and TR750.

Answer:
1. At the production level of 100 units of output, the producer incurs 1500 TC and 1500 TR. So there will be no profit or loss to the producer

2. When TC =1000
TR = 750
Loss = TC-TR
= 1000-750 = 250

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
How would each of the following affect the market supply curve for wheat?

  1. A new and improved technique is discovered.
  2. The price of fertilizers falls
  3. The government offers new tax concessions to farmers
  4. Bad weather affects the crops.

Answer:

  1. A new and improved technique is discovered: increase market supply
  2. The price of fertilizers falls: increase market supply
  3. The government offers new tax concessions to farmers: increase market supply
  4. Bad weather affects the crops: decrease market supply

Question 3.
The following table shows the total cost schedule of a competitive firm. It is given that the price of the good is ₹10. Calculate the profit at each output level. Find the profit maximizing level of output.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img9
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img10

Question 4.
Explain briefly break even point with the help of an example.
Answer:
XUS Break even point refers to a situation when total revenue is equal to total cost assuming a given selling price per unit of output.
TR = TC
This can be explained with the help of an example.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img11
If the firm produces less than 200 units, itsTR< TC. So it bears loss. If the firm produces more than 200 units, its TR > TC. So it earns profit.

If the firm produces 200 units, its TR = TC. This is the breakeven point. Break even point is a normal profit point as beyond it the firm earns super normal profits and below it, the firm incur losses.

Question 5.
Choose the correct answer
a. profit of a firm is the revenue earned:

  1. zero of cost
  2. net of cost
  3. gross of cost
  4. none of these

b. TMC curve cuts LAC curve :

  1. at minimum point
  2. at maximum point
  3. below the LAC curve
  4. none of these

c. under perfect competition, firm is :

  1. price taker
  2. price maker
  3. both 1 and 2
  4. none of the above

d. MR can be negative but AR is:

  1. negative
  2. positive
  3. either positive or negative
  4. none of the above

Answer:
a. net of cost
b. at minimum point
c. price taker
d. positive

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
Observe the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img12
Plot the break even point and shut down point.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img13

  • Point ‘A’ represents shut down point
  • Point ‘B’ represents the break even point.

Question 7.
Complete the following tables and identify the market structure
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img14
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img15
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img16
This market represents a perfectly competitive market because in this market, P = AR = MR.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img17
This market represents a monopoly market. In this market, AR and MR are different and AR > MR.

Question 8.
At the market price of ₹10, a firm supplies 4 units of orange. The market price rises to ₹30. The price elasticity of the firm’s supply is 1.25. What quantity will the firm supply at the new price?
Answer:
In the given example,
P = 10 Q = 4 P1 = 30 es = 1.25
ΔP = 30-10 = 20
Applying these values in the formula, we get, \(e_{s}=\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta P} \times \frac{P}{Q}\)
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img18
ΔQ =1.25×8=10

Question 9.
Suppose that the market demand in a perfectly competitive industry is given by, Qd = 7000 – 500 p and the market supply function is given by, Qs = 4000 +250 P. Find the market equilibrium price.
Answer:
Equilibrium is determined by the condition,
Qd = Qs.
In this example,
7000-500 p = 4000 +250 p
7000-4000 = 250 p + 500 p
3000 = 750 P
∴ \(P=\frac{3000}{750}=4\)
Therefore, the equilibrium price in the market is ₹4.
7000 – 500 p = 4000 + 250 p
7000 – 4000 = 250 p + 500 p
3000 = 750 P
∴ \(P=\frac{3000}{750}=4\)

HSSLive.Guru

Question 10.
Point out the features of perfect competition.
Answer:
Features of perfect competion are pointed out below.

  1. Large number of buyers and sellers
  2. Homogeneous product
  3. Freedom of entry and exit
  4. Free movement of product and factors of production.
  5. Profit motive.
  6. Perfect knowledge of market conditions
  7. Absence of transport cost.

Question 11.
Identify from the diagram below.

  1. Shutdown point and breakeven point.
  2. Distinguish between these two.

Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img19
1. c is the break even point. b is the shut even point

2. Break down point shows a situation where a firm earns no profit or no loss. It is the point where AR = AC. Shut down point shows a situation where a firm is compelled to stop the production since it is not able to cover its variable cost. This is the situation where the firm’s P > AVC.

Question 12.
Identify the profit maximizing level of output from the diagram below. List out the condition for profit maximization.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img20
Answer:
b is the profit maximizing level of output.
MR = MC
At the profit maximizing level of output MC is non decreasing, that is the slope of MC is positive.
P > AVC.

Question 13.
Match the commodities given below with the diagram. Justify your answer.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img21
Answer:
a. Mobile Phone

b. Coconut
The supply of mobile phones are relatively price elastic. This is because the purchase of mobile phones can easily react to a change in price. It is a manufactured good. All the raw materials needed to produce a mobile phone can easily be available. The producers can pile up stock and when price increases they can increase the supply.

The supply of coconut can be price inelastic. This is because the producers cannot easily react to a change in the price of coconut. Years needed for a coconut tree to get mature and start to produce coconuts. It is an agricultural product. The producers cannot hold the stock of coconut fora longer duration.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 14.
The following table gives you certain information about a firm.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img22

  1. Find the price at which output is sold and identify the form market,
  2. Is this firm a price-taker or price-maker? Give reasons.
  3. Find the firm’s equilibrium level of output in terms of MC &MR. Give reasons.
  4. Also find profit of the firm at this level of output.

Answer:

  1. Price = 8
  2. Price-taker, a firm has no influence on price determination under perfect competition.
  3. Equilibrium quantity is 3. At this level of output MC=MR.
  4. Firm is at no profit-no loss condition, i. e., he is at break even point.

Plus Two Economics The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a seminar report on ‘perfect competitive markets’
Answer:
Respected teachers and dear friends,
The topic of my seminar paper is perfect competitive markets. The term market refers to all the places in which buyers and sellers are in contact with each other for the purchase and sale of any commodity or service. There are different kinds of markets based on their characteristics – say perfect competitive markets and noncompetitive markets.

Introduction:
Perfect competition is a market situation characterized by the existence of large number of buyers and sellers, homogeneous products, free mobility of factors of production, freedom of entry and exit, perfect knowledge of market conditions and absence of transportation costs.

Contents:

  1. Profit Maximisation
  2. Profit Maximisation in short-run: Diagrammatic representation
  3. Long run profit maximisation

1. Profit Maximisation:
The main objective of the producer is to maximize the profit levels of his firm. The output level at which the firm maximizes the profit is called the equilibrium of the firm. The profit level of the firm is the difference between Total Revenue and Total Cost. Symbolically it is represented as X = TR – TC.

The firm under perfect competition maximizes its profit under three conditions. They are:

  • The MC must be equal to MR (MC = MR)
  • MC must be non-decreasing. It means that MC curve should cut the MR from below.
  • Third condition has two parts, one for short-term and the other for long-term.

a. In the short run, price should be more than or equal to the minimum point of Average Variable Cost (AVC). It can be denoted as P> AVC.

b. In the long run, price should be more than or equal to the minimum point of Average Cost (AC). It can be denoted as P > AC.

2. Profit Maximisation in short run: Diagrammatic representation:
The profit maximizing condition of a firm in short-run can be understood from the figure. All the three profit maximizing conditions of a firm in short run are satisfied at point of output level q0.

  • The price must be equal to MC (P = MC)
  • MC must be non-decreasing.
  • P > AVC

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img23
All the profit maximizing conditions are satisfied in the figure given above.

  1. The prices become equal to MC. At point E, the firm reaches equilibrium at the output level q (MC = MR).
  2. At q MC is non-decreasing at point E.
  3. At point E, prices have become more than AVC (P > AVC at point E).

Therefore, three conditions for the equilibrium level of output are depicted in a single figure.

3. Long run profit maximisation:
The profit maximization level of the firm is reached when the long run supply curve of the firm is that portion of LRMC curve which lies over and above the minimum point of LRAC curve (P > minimum of LRAC). The supply curve of a firm, in the long run, is the rising portion of minimum point of LMRC. It can be explained with the help of the following figure.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img24

Conclusion:
Thus it can be concluded that perfect competition is a market structure characterized by complete absence rivalry among individual sellers. Sellers in the market do not hold any freedom of influencing market prices. Therefore, they are known as price takers. However, it should be admitted that it is a rare form of market.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
The diagram shows one of the short run equilibrium situations of a firm under perfect competition.

  1. List out any four features of such market condition.
  2. Identify the equilibrium situation of the firm profit, normal profit, loss diagrammatically. Show a situation in which the firm makes a profit.
  3. With the help of a diagram explain the long run situation of a firm under perfect competition.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img25
Answer:
1. Market Conditions:

  • Large number of sellers
  • Homegeneous product
  • Firm is a price taker
  • Free entry and exit

2. The firm is making a normal profit.
The firm produces ‘oq’ level of output and charges a price ‘op’. The shaded area in the diagram shows profit.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img26
3. Firm under perfeert competition in the long run makes only normal profit. This is because if firms are making profit, new entrants will be attracted into the industry.

The price falls due to increase in supply and the extra profit will be taken away. If the firms are making loss some of them will leave the industry, price rises and the loss will be turned into profit. This is shown in the diagram below.

The firm under perfect competition in the long run will produce ‘oq’ level of output and charges a price ‘op’.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img27

Question 3.
How are price and output determined under perfect competition in the short run? Compare the profit of a firm in the short run and long run and bring out the difference. Give suitable diagram.
Answer:
Under perfect competition, market determines the price – price taker and not price maker firms produce the output that maximises its profit – a firm may get abnormal profit or normal profit or loss in the short run – only normal profit will prevail in the long run – due to free entry and exit – Draws separate diagram for short run and long run-explains price and output determination as well as profit in short run and long run.

PROFIT MAXIMIZATION IN SHORT-RUN:
DIAGRAMMATIC REPRESENTATION:
The profit maximizing condition of a firm in short-rn can be understood from the figure. All the three profit maximizing conditions of a firm in short run are satisfied at point of output level q0.

  1. The price must be equal to MC (P = MC)
  2. MC must be non-decreasing.
  3. P > AVC

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img28

All the profit maximizing conditions are satisfied in the figure given above.

  1. The prices become equal to MC. At point E, the firm reaches equilibrium at the output level q (MC = MR). 0
  2. At q MC is non-decreasing at point E.
  3. At point E, prices have become more than AVC (P > AVC at point E).

Therefore, three conditions for the equilibrium level of output are depicted in a single figure.

LONG RUN PROFIT MAXIMISATION:
The profit maximization level of the firm is reached when the long run supply curve of the firm is that portion of LRMC curve which lies over and above the minimum point of LRAC curve (P>minimum of LRAC). The supply curve of a firm, in the long run, is the rising portion of minimum point of LMRC. It can be explained with the help of the following figure.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 The Theory of The Firm Under Perfect Competition img29

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Students can Download Chapter 7 Alternating Current Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A 100Ω resistor is connected to a 220V, 50 Hz ac supply.

  1. What is the rms value of current in the circuit?
  2. What is the net power consumed over a full cycle?

Answer:
Given R = 100Ω, Eν = 220V, ν = 50 Hz.
1. Since lν = \(\frac{E_{ν}}{12}\)
So lν = \(\frac{220}{100}\) = 2.2 A

2. P = Eν Iν = 220 × 2.2
or P = 484 W.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.

  1. The peak voltage of an ac supply is 300V. What is the rms voltage?
  2. The rms value of current in an ac circuit is 10A. What is the peak current?

Answer:
1. Given E0 = 300 V, E = ?
Since Eν = \(\frac{E_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}\) = 0.707 × 300
or Eν = 212.1V.

2. Given Iν = 10A, I0=?
Since l0 = \(\sqrt{2}\) Eν = 1.414 × 10
or I = 14.14 A.

Question 3.
A 44 mH inductor is connected to 220V, 50 Hz ac supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit.
Answer:
Given L = 44 mH = 44 × 10-3H
Eν = 220V, ν = 50Hz, Iν = ?
Since Iν = \(\frac{E_{ν}}{x_{L}}=\frac{220}{\omega L}\)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 1
or Iν = 15.9A.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 4.
A 60µF capacitor is connected to a 11OV, 60 Hz ac supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit.
Answer:
Given C = 60µF = 60 × 10-6F, Eν = 110V, ν = 60 Hz.
Since Iν = \(\frac{E_{ν}}{x_{c}}\)
∴ Iν = ωCEν
= 2pνCEν = 2 × 3.142 × 60 × 60 × 10-6 × 110
= 2.49A or
Iν = 2.49V.

Question 5.
In Exercises 7.3 and 7.4, what is the net power absorbed by each circuit over a complete cycle. Explain your answer.
Answer:
In both the cases the net power consumed is zero because in both the cases.
Net power consumed P = Eν lνcosΦ
and Φ =90°
∴ P = 0 (in each case).

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 6.
Obtain the resonant frequency of a series LCR circuit with L=2.0H, C=32µV and R = 10?. What is the Q-value of this circuit?
Answer:
Given L = 2.0H, C = 32µF = 32 × 10-6F
R = 10Ω, Q = ?, ω0 = ?
Resonant frequency
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 2

Question 7.
A charged 30µF capacitor is connected to a 27mH inductor. What is the angular frequency of free oscillations of the circuit?
Answer:
Given C = 30µF=30 × 10-6F,L = 27mH = 27 × 10-3H
ω0 = ?
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 3
or ω0 = 1.1 × 10-3S-1.

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which type of transformer you use to operate the coffee maker at 220 V?
Answer:
Step down transformer.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.
In an A C. circuit, Irms and Io are related as.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 4
Answer:
(d) Irms = \(\frac{I_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 3.
A capacitor of capacitance C has reactance X. If capacitance and frequency become double then reactance will be
(a)  4X
(b) X/2
(c) X/4
(d) 2X
Answer:
(c) Explanation
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 5

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 4.
Fill in the blanks

  • Impedance: admittance
  • ……………..: conductance

Answer:
Resistance

Question 5.
Why it is better to use an inductor rather than a resistor to limit the current through the fluorescent lamp?
Answer:
No power is developed across the inductor as heat.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 6.
In an a.c circuit with phase voltage V and current I, the power dissipated is
(a) V.l
(b) Depends on phase angle between V and I
(c) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × V.I
(d) \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
(b) Depends on phase angle between V and I

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 6
Answer:
(i) Current lags by π/2
(ii) Xc = 1/cω
(iii) R
(iv) Phase difference is zero.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.
A.C. adaptor converts household ac into low voltage dc. A stepdown transformer is a essential part of ac adapter.

  1. What is the use of step down transformer?
  2. What is the principle of a transformer? Explain.

Answer:

  1. To decrease voltage
  2. It works on the principle of mutual induction.

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 7
Answer:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 8

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.

The following figure is a part of a radio circuit.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 9

  1. Identify the circuit.
  2. What happens to this circuit if XL = XC
  3. lf XC > XL draw the phaser diagram.

Answer:
1. LCR circuit.

2. When XL = XC, the impedance of circuit becomes minimum and the current corresponding to that frequency is maximum.

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 10

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Figure below shows a bulb connected in an electrical circuit.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 11
1. When the key is switched ON the bulb obtains maximum glow only after a shorter interval of time which property of the solenoid is responsible for the delay?

  • Self-induction
  • Mutual Induction
  • Inductive reactance
  • None of the above

2. If the flux linked with the solenoid changes from 0 to 1 weber in 2 sec. Find the induced emf in the solenoid.

3. If the 3v battery is replaced by an AC source with the key closed, what will be observation? Justify your answer.
Answer:
1. Self-induction.

2. \(\frac{d \phi}{d t}=\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5V.

3. When AC is connected the brightness of bulb will be decreased. This is due to the back emf in the circuit.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.
A graph connecting the voltage generated by an a.c. source and time is shown.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 12

  1. What is the maximum voltage generated by the source?
  2. Write the relation connecting voltage and time
  3. This a.c. source, when connected to a resistor, produces 40J of heat per second. Find the equivalent d.c. voltage which will produce the same heat in this resistor.

Answer:

  1. 200v.
  2. V = V0sin ωt
  3. \(V_{\max }=\frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{200}{\sqrt{2}}\) = 141.8v.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 3.
An inductor, capacitor, and resister are connected in series to an a.c. source V = V0sin ωt.

  1. Draw a circuit diagram of L.C.R. series circuit with applied a.c. voltage.
  2. Find an expression for impedance of L.C.R. series circuit using phasor diagram.
  3. What is impedance of L.C.R. series circuit at resonance?

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 13

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 14
For impedance of LCR circuit.
From the right angled triangle OAE,
Final voltage, V = \(\sqrt{v_{n}^{2}+\left(v_{L}-v_{c}\right)^{2}}\)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 15
Where Z is called impedance of LCR circuit

3. Impedance, Z=R.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 4.
A voltage source is connected to an electrical component X as shown in figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 16
1. Identify the device X.
2. Which of the following equations can represent the current through the circuit?

  • i = im sin(ωt + π/2)
  • i = im sin(ωt – π/2)
  • i = im sin ωt
  • i = im sin(ωt + π/4)

3. Draw the phasor diagram for the circuit. (2)
Answer:
1. Resistor
2. i = im sin ωt
3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 17

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 5.
A friend from abroad presents you a coffee maker when she visited you. Unfortunately, it was designed to operate at 110V line to obtain 960W power that it needs.

  1. Which type of transformer you use to operate the coffee maker at 220V? (1)
  2. Assuming the transformer you use as ideal, calculate the primary and secondary currents. (2)
  3. What is the resistance of the coffee maker? (1)

Answer:
1. Step down transformer.

2. Since the transformer is ideal
VpIp = Vs Is = 960W, Vp = 220v, Vs = 110v
VpIp =960
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 18

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 19

Plus Two Physics Alternating Current Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The voltage-current values obtained from a transformer constructed by a student is shown in the following table.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 20

  1. Identify the transformer as step up or step down.
  2. How much power is wasted by the transformer?
  3. What are the possible energy losses in a transformer?
  4. If the input voltage is 48v and input current is 1 A, is it possible to light 240v, 100w bulb using the above transformer. Justify.

Answer:
1. Step down transformer.

2. Power loss = 200w -10w = 190w

3. The possible energy losses in a transformer:

  • Eddy current loss
  • Copper loss
  • Hysteries loss
  • Flux leakage

4. In this case input power = VI = 48 × 1 = 48W.
If transformer does not waste energy, input power =out put power.
Hence maximum output power 48W. But bulb requires 100w. Hence the bulb does not glow with this low input power.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 2.
The current through fluorescent lights are usually limited using an inductor.

  1. Obtain the relation i = im sin(ωt – π/2)for an inductor across which an alternating emf v = vm sin ωt is applied. (2)
  2. Why it is better to use an inductor rather than a resistor to limit the current through the fluorescent lamp? (1)
  3. When 100 V DC source is connected across a coil a current of 1 A flows through it. When 100V, 50 Hz AC source is applied across the same coil only 0.5 A flows. Calculate the resistance and inductance of the coil. (2)

Answer:
1. AC voltage applied to an Inductor
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 26
Consider a circuit containing an inductor of inductance ‘L’ connected to an alternating voltage. Let the applied voltage be
V = V0 sinωt…………(1)
Due to the flow of alternating current through coil, an emf, \(\mathrm{L} \frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{I}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) is produced in the coil. This induced emf is equal and opposite to the applied emf (in the case of ideal inductor).
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 21
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 22

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

2. No power is developed across the inductor as heat.

3. Resistance of the coil R = \(\frac{v}{I}=\frac{100}{1}\) = 100Ω. Current through the coil when ac source is applied.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 23
R2 + X2L = 2002
X2L = 2002 – 1002
XL = 173.2Ω
Lω = 173.2
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 24

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current

Question 3.
An alternating voltage is connected to a box with some unknown circuital arrangement. The applied voltage and current through the circuit are measured as v = 80 sinωt volt and i = 1.6 sin(ωt + 45°) ampere.

  1. Does the current lead or lag the voltage?
  2. Is the circuit in the box largely capacitive or inductive?
  3. Is the circuit in the box at resonance?
  4. What is the average power delivered by the box?

Answer:
1. Leads.

2. Capacitive

3. No Hint: Current and voltage are not in the same phase.

4. P = VrmslrmsCosΦ, Vm = 80v, im = 1.6A
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Alternating Current - 25
p = 45.25W

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Students can Download Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Plus Two Chemistry Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following is most acidic?
(a) H20
(b) CH3OH
(c) C2H5OH
(d) CH3CH2CH2OH
Answer:
(a) H2O

Question 2.
Propan-1 -ol on reaction with conc.H2SO4 at 413 K gives _____________
Answer:
1 -Propoxy propane

Question 3.
Which of the following alcohols can be obtained from HCHO?
(a) CH3OH
(b) C2H5OH
(c) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 4.
Phenol can be distinguished from ethyl alcohol by all reagents except
(a) NaOH
(b) Na
(c) Br2/H2O
(d) FeCl3
Answer:
(b) Na

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 5.
Anisole on reaction with HI forms
(a) phenol and methyl iodide
(b) iodobenzene and methanol
(c) benzene and methyl iodide
(d) phenol and methanal
Answer:
(a) phenol and methyl iodide

Question 6.
Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of acidity: Phenol, Alcohol, and Water.
Answer:
Alcohol < Water < Phenol

Question 7.
Phenol is distinguished from ethanol by the following reagents except.
(a) Iron
(b) Sodium
(c) Bromin
(d) NaOH
Answer:
(b) Sodium

Question 8.
Phenol can be converted to o-hydroxy benzaldehyde by
Answer:
Reimer-Tiemann reaction.

Question 9.
4-methoxy acetophenone can be prepared from anisol by ______________
Answer:
Friedel crafts reaction.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 10.
Which of the following does not answer idoform test?
(a) 1-propanol
(b) Ethanol
(c) 2 propanol
(d) Ethanal
Answer:
(a) 1- propanol

Question 11.
Chlorination of toluene in presence of light and heat followed by treatment with aqeous KOH gives ________
Answer:
Benzyl alcohol.

Plus Two Chemistry Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Reaction of alcohol with metallic sodium is used as a test for alcohol. Substantiate this statement with the help of an equation.
Answer:
Alcohol reacts with metallic Na to form sodium alkoxide with the liberation of H2.
ROH + Na → RONa + 1/2 H2

Question 2.
Ethyl alcohol gives iodoform test. Methyl alcohol does not give iodoform test.

  1. Do you agree with this?
  2. If yes or no, substantiate your view.
  3. How can you distinguish between 1 -butanol and 2-butanol?

Answer:
1. Yes.

2. Compounds containing CH3CO- group and CH3CH(OH)- group on reaction with iodine and alkali give yellow colour of iodoform. Ethanol contains CH3CH (OH) – group.

3. 2-Butanol gives iodoform test as it contains CH3CH(OH)-group, whereas 1-Butanol does not answer iodoform test.

Question 3.
When an organic compound is treated with neutral ferric chloride a violet colour is obtained. What will be the compound? Explain.
Answer:
Phenol. Phenol forms a violet-coloured water soluble complex with ferric chloride.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 4.
– O – is the functional group of ether. Classify the following into two groups with appropriate heading.
CH3-O-CH3, CH3-O-C2H5, C2H5-O-C2H5, C6H5– O – CH3.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers two mark q4 img 1

Question 5.
Explain how does the -OH group attached to a carbon of benzene ring activates it towards electrophilic substitution reaction?
Answer:
In phenol, the -OH group is directly attached to a carbon of benzene ring. The lone pair of oxygen participates into resonance with the benzene ring. As a result, electron density on benzene ring increases making it more easy to attack by an electrophile.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers two mark q5 img 2

Question 6.
Write down the equations for the following conversions using Grignard reagent?
Methanal → Ethanol
Ethanal → 2-Propanol
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers two mark q6 img 3

Question 7.
Explain why propanol has higher boiling point than that of the hydrocarbon, butane?
Answer:
Propanol has higher boiling point than butane because it has stronger interparticle forces. In propanol intermolecular hydrogen bonding is present whereas in butane intermolecular forces are weak van der Waals’ forces. A lot of heat is required to break intermolecular hydrogen bonding among propanol molecules.

Question 8.
While separating a mixture of ortho and para nitrophenols by stream distillation, name the isomer which will be steam volatile. Give reason.
Answer:
Ortho-Nitrophenol is steam volatile because in it there is intramolecular hydrogen bonding.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers two mark q8 img 4

Due to intramolecular hydrogen bonding, the intermolecular forces in ortho-nitrophenol are weaker than that in para-nitrophenol (which has intermolecular hydrogen bonding) and hence it undergoes less association.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 9.
Give reason for higher boiling point of ethanol in comparison to methoxy methane.
Answer:
In ethanol the intermolecular forces are hydrogen bonds whereas in methoxymethane the intermolecular forces are dipole-diple forces. Since the intermolecular forces in ethanol are stronger than those in methoxymethane it has higher boiling point than methoxymethane.

Question 10.
While separating a mixture of ortho and para nitro phenols by steam distillation, name the isomer, which will be steam volatile. Give reason.
Answer:
Ortho-Nitro phenol exhibit intramolecular hydrogen bonding and para-Nitro phenol exhibit intermolecular hydrogen bonding. The ortho isomer is steam volatile because there is not intermolecular association.

Plus Two Chemistry Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write a notes on:

  1. Rectified Spirit
  2. Power Alcohol
  3. Denatured Spirit

Answer:
1. 95.6% ethyl alcohol is known as a rectified spirit.

2. A mixture of ethyl alcohol and gasoline can be used as a fuel in the internal combustion engine. It is known as power alcohol.

3. Commercial alcohol is made unfit for drinking by adding certain substances like pyridine, methanol etc. Spirit thus obtained is called denatured spirit.

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers three mark q2 img 5
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers three mark q2 img 6

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 3.
Ethyl alcohol can be prepared by fermentation of molasses.

  1. What do you mean by fermentation?
  2. Explain the process.
  3. What do you mean by ‘wash’?

Answer:
1. Fermentation is the process of breaking up of large molecules into small molecule in the presence of biological catalyst called enzymes.

2. Molasses is the mother liquor left behind after the crystallisation of cane sugar from sugar cane juice. It is 40% sucrose solution. First it is diluted to 10% solution. Then yeast is added. Temperature of the system is kept at 305 K. The following reactions will take place.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers three mark q3 img 7

3. 8-10% ethyl alcohol is known as ‘wash’.

Question 4.
Raju prepared soap in the chemistry lab. A liquid remained after the preparation. He argued that it was useless.

  1. Do you agree with him? Why?
  2. How can you prepare glycerol from spentlye?

Answer:

  1. No. It can be used to prepare glycerol.
  2. Spentlye contains unreacted alkali, glycerol, water, NaCI, and soluble soap. It is first treated with acid to remove alkali, then with aluminium sulphate to remove soluble soap. It is then evaporated under reduced pressure to remove NaCI.

The resulting solution is then decolorised using animal charcoal, Then the solution is distilled under reduced pressure to remove water. In this way we get glycerol.

Question 5.
When an old sample of ether was heated, it exploded.

  1. What is the reason for this phenomenon?
  2. How can you detect peroxide content in ether?
  3. How can we remove peroxide from old sample of ether?

Answer:

  1. Due to the formation of peroxide.
  2. Presence of peroxide can be tested by adding ferrous salt solution followed by addition of KCNS solution. Formation of blood red colour indicates the presence of peroxide.
  3. The peroxide can be removed by washing with ferrous salt solution.

Question 6.
Alcohols are comparatively more soluble in water than hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain this fact.
Answer:
Because of the presence of O-H group in them, alcohols are capable of forming hydrogen bonds with water molecules whereas hydrocarbons cannot form hydrogen bonds with water. As a result, alcohols are more soluble in water than the hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.

Question 7.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of monohydric phenols of molecular formula, C7H8O.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers three mark q7 img 8

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 8.
Explain why ortho-nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho-methoxyphenol?
Answer:
ortho-Nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho- methoxyphenol because nitro group by its electron withdrawing resonance effect stabilises the phenoxide ion whereas methoxy group by its electron releasing effect destabilises the phenoxide ion. Greater the stability of the phenoxide ion, greater is the dissociation of phenol and greater is its acid strength.

Question 9.
With the help of a mixture of con. HCI and ZnCI2 how can you distinguish between 1°, 2°, 3° alcohols.
Answer:

  • 1° alcohol + Lucas reagent → no reaction
  • 2° alcohol + Lucas reagent → turbidity within five minutes
  • 3° alcohol + Lucas reagent → turbidity occurs immediately

Lucas reagent anhydrous ZnCI2/HCI

Plus Two Chemistry Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following:

AB
Oxidising AgentLucas Test.
DehydrogenationLiAIH4.
Anhydrous ZnCI2, HCICopper at 573K.
Reducing AgentAcidified KMnO4.

Answer:

AB
Oxidising AgentAcidified KMnO4.
DehydrogenationCopper at 573K.
Anhydrous ZnCI2, HCILucas Test.
Reducing AgentLiAIH4.

Question 2.

a) Alcohols are having high boiling points than corresponding alkyl halides and ethers. Why?
b) Phenol is more acidic than ethanol. Give the reason.
c) Predict the products :
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q2 img 9
Answer:
a) Due to the presence of polar hydroxyl group alcohols can associate through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
b) Phenoxide ion is stabilized by resonance while alkoxide ion has no resonance stabilisation.
c)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q2 img 10

Question 3

  1. Phenol is acidic even though it has no carboxylic group, why?
  2. Convert phenol to salicylic acid and name the reaction.

Answer:
1. By the removal of a proton from phenol a phenoxide ion is obtained. It is stabilised by resonance. Hence phenol acts as an acid.
2.

. Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q3 img 11

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 4.
1. Compare the solubility of diethyl ether and n- butane in water.
2. Give the product(s) from the reaction of one mole of diethyl ether with

  • one mole of conc. HI and
  • excess of HI.

Answer:
1. Diethyl ether being weakly polar is capable of forming intermolecular hydrogen bonding with water. Hence, diethyl ether is soluble in water while n-butane is not.

2. The product(s) from the reaction of one mole of diethyl ether.

  • C2H5OH and C2H5I
  • 2C2H5I

Question 5.
Identify X and Y.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q5 img 12
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q5 img 13

Question 6.
1. Boiling point depends on the inter molecular hydrogen bonding.

  • Ethanol and propane have comparable molecular masses but their boiling points differ widely. Why?

2. Williamson synthesis is an important method of ether synthesis. Which of the following reactions is better for ether synthesis? Justify.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q6 img 14
Answer:
1. Ethanol molecules are associated by intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

  • Ethanol molecules are associated by intermolecular hydrogen bonding. This is absent in propane. So Ethanol has higher boiling point.

2. (CH3)3C-ONa + CH3-Br is better. The tertiary alkyl halide undergoes elimination in presence of base to form alkene.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q6 img 15

Question 7.
Chloro methane reacts with aqueous sodium hydroxide to form methanol.

  1. What happens when chlorobenzene reacts with aqueous sodium hydroxide? Justify.
  2. Write the reaction by which chlorobenzene can be converted to phenol.

Answer:

  1. No reaction. This is due to sp2 state of carbon to which CI is attached, less polarity of C-X bond and resonance stabilisation.
  2. Dow’s process.
    When chlorobenzene is heated with sodium hydroxide solution at 623 K under a pressure of 200 atm in the presence of copper catalyst, sodium phenoxide is obtained. This on hydrolysis gives phenol.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q7 img 16

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 8.
Phenol exhibit acidic character.

  1. Why phenol exhibit acidic character?
  2. Explain it with the help of resonating structure of phenoxide ion.

Answer:

  1. Phenol can donate proton and phenoxide ion thus formed is stabilized by resonance.
  2. The resonating structure of phenoxide ion is given below.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q8 img 17

Question 9.
What is the action of phenol with

  1. Aqueous Br2?
  2. Br2 in CS2?
  3. Nitrating mixture?
  4. dil. HNO3?

Answer:
1. Phenol on action with aqueous Br2 gives 2, 4, 6,- tribromophenol.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q9 img 18

2. Phenol on action with Br2 in CS2 gives o- bromophenol and p-bromophenol.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q9 img 19

3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q9 img 20

4.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q9 img 21

Question 10.
Write notes on
a) Kolbe’s reaction
b) Reimer-Tiemann reaction
Answer:
a) Kolbe’s reaction: When Sodium phenoxide is heated with CO2 at 400 K and under a pressure 6-7 atm, sodium salicylate is obtained. This on hydrolysis gives ortho-hydroxy benzoic acid or salicylic acid.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers four mark q10 img 22
Reimer – Tiemman reaction: When phenol is heated with CHCI3 at 340 K, o-hydroxy benzaldehyde or salicylaldehyde is obtained.

Question 11.

  1. Fill in the blanks:
    CH3CH2OH + SOCI2 → CH3CH2CI+ …?… +….?….
  2. This method is used to prepare extra pure alkyl halide. Do you agree? Why?

Answer:

  1. CH3CH2OH + SOCI2 -> CH3CH2CI + SO2 + HCI
  2. Yes. The by products are escapable gases. Hence, the reaction gives pure alkyl halides.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 12.
1. Arrange the compounds in the increasing order of their strength.

  • 4-Nitro phenol
  • Phenol
  • Propan-1-ol
  • 4-Methyl phenol.

2. You are given benzene, conc.H2SO4, and NaOH. Prepare phenol using these compounds.
Answer:
1. 4-Nitrophenol > Phenol > 4-Methylphenol > 1- Propanol. Presence of electron with darwing groups at ortho and para positions increases the acidic strength of substituted phenols.

2. By the action of benzene with conc.H2SO4 & NaOH, sodium benzene sulphonate is formed. This on acidification gives phenol.

Plus Two Chemistry Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain why propanol has higher boiling point than that of the hydrocarbon, butane?
Answer:
Propanol has higher boiling point than butane because it has stronger interparticle forces. In propanol intermolecular hydrogen bonding is present whereas in butane intermolecular forces are weak van der Waals’ forces. A lot of heat is required to break intermolecular hydrogen bonding among propanol molecules.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 2.
Alcohols are comparatively more soluble in water than hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain this fact.
Answer:
Because of the presence of O-H group in them, alcohols are capable of forming hydrogen bonds with water molecules whereas hydrocarbons cannot form hydrogen bonds with water. As a result, alcohols are more soluble in water than the hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.

Question 3.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of monohydric phenols of molecular formula, C7H8O.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers ncert q3 img 23

Question 4.
Explain why ortho-nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho-methoxy phenol?
Answer:
ortho-Nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho methoxy phenol because nitro group by its electron with drawing resonance effect stabilises the phenoxide ion whereas methoxy group by its electron releasing effect destabilises the phenoxide ion. Greater the stability of the phenoxide ion, greater is the dissociation of phenol and greater is its acid strength.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 5.
Give IUPAC names of the following ethers:
i) C2H5OCH2-CH(CH3)CH3
ii) CH3OCH2CH2CI
iii) O2N-C6H4-OCH3(p)
iv) CH3CH2CH2OCH3
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers ncert q3 img 24
Answer:
i) 1-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
ii) 2-Chloro-1-methoxyethane
iii) 4-Nitroanisole
iv) 1-Methoxypropane
v) 1-Ethoxy-4, 4-dimethyl cyclohexane
vi) Ethoxybenzene

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Students can Download Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A horizontal straight wire 10m long extending from east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0ms-1 at right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field 0.3 × 10-4Wbm2.

  1. What is the instantaneous value of the e.m.f? induced in the wire?
  2. What is the direction of the e.m.f.?
  3. Which end of the wire is at the higher electrical potential?

Answer:
I – 10m, v = 5.0ms-1, B = 0.30 × 10-4Wbm2
1. Instantaneous value of e.m.f. induced
e = B lv
= 0.30 × 10-4 × 10 × 5.0
or e = 1.5 × 10-3V.

2. The direction of e.m.f. is from eastto west.

3. Since the current is flowing from east to west so the eastern end is at higher potential.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 2.
Current in a circuit falls from 5.0Ato 0.0A in 0.1s. If an average e.m.f. of 200V induced, give an estimate of the self-inductance of the circuit.
Answer:
dl = l2 – l1 = 0.0 – 5.0 = -5.0A,
dt = 0.1s, e = 200V, L=?
Since
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 1
or L = 4H

Question 3.
A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1 5H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20A in 0.5s. What is the charge of flux linkage with the other coil?
Answer:
M= 1.5H, dl = l2 – l1 = 20 – 0 = 20A, dt = 0.5s, dΦ = ?
Since
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 2
And also
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 3
or dΦ = Mdl
or dΦ = 1.5 × 20 = 30 Wb.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 4.
A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of 1800 km/h. What is the voltage difference developed between the ends of the wing 25m long if the earth’s magnetic field at the location has a magnitude of 5.0 × 10-4 and the dip angle is 30?
Answer:
v = 1800 km/h = 500ms-1 I = 25m
Vertical component of B along horizontal
B = -Bsinθ = 5.0 × 10-4 sin30° = 2.5 × 10-4T
e = B/v sinθ
= 500 × 2.5 × 10-4 × 25
= 31 V
The direction ofthe wing is immaterial.

Question 5.
Suppose the loop in Q.6.4 is stationary but the current feeding the electromagnet that produces the magnetic field is gradually reduced so that the field decreases from its initial value of 0.3T at the rate of 0.02TS-1. If the cut is joined and the loop has a resistance of 1.6Ω, how much power is dissipated by the loops as heat? What is the source of this power?
Answer:
Induced e.m.f.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 4
= 8 × 2 × 10-4 × 0.02 = 3.2 × 10-5V
Induced current,
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers 5
= 2 × 10-5A
Power Loss = I2r = (2 × 10-5)2 × 1.6 = 6.4 × 10-10 W. Source of this power is the external agent responsible for changing the magnetic field with time.

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Induction One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Eddy current are produced when.
(a) a metal is kept in varying magnetic field
(b) a metal is kept in steady magnetic field
(c) a circular coil is placed in a magnetic field
(d) through a circular coil, current is passed
Answer:
(a) a metal is kept in varying magnetic field

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 2.
A100 milli henry coil carries a current of 1 A. energy stored in its magnetic field is
(a) 0.5 J
(b) 1 A
(c) 0.05 J
(d) 0.1 J
Answer:
(c) 0.05 J
Explanation : E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) LI2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (100 × 10-3) × 12
= 0.05 J.

Question 3.
A straight line conductor of length 0.4 m is moved with a speed of 7m/s perpendicular to a magnetic field of intensity 0.9 Wb/m2. The induced e. m. f. across the conductor is.
(a) 5.04 V
(b) 25.2 V
(c) 1.26 V
(d) 2.52
Answer:
(d) 2.52
Induced e.m.f (s) = B/V
= 0.9 × 0.4 × 7 = 2.52V.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 4.
The core of a transformer is laminated because
(a) ratio of voltage in primary and secondary may be increased
(b) energy losses due to eddy currents may be minimized
(c) the weight of the transformer may be reduced
(d) rusting of the core may be prevented
Answer:
(b)

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Induction Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Four Questions and Answers 6
A conductor XY is moving through a uniform magnetic field of intensity B as shown in figure.

  1. Name the emf.
  2. The motion of XY towards right side causes an anticlockwise induced current. What will be the direction of magnetic induction in the region A?
  3. The length of the conductor XY is 20cm. It is moving with a velocity 50m/s perpendicular to the magnetic fie Id. If the induced emf in the conductor is 2V find the magnitudes of magnetic field?

Answer:
1. Motional emf/induced emf.

2. Applying right hand grip rule at A direction of magnetic field is away from the paper.

3. ε = Blvsinθ, I = 20cm = 20 × 10-2m, v
= 50m/s, ε = 2v
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Four Questions and Answers 7
= 0.2 T.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 2.
1. When S1 close bulb glows instantaneously when S2 closes there is a delay in glowing the bulb.(1) This is due to………

  • resistance of the coil
  • back emf in the coil
  • mutual induction
  • none

Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Four Questions and Answers 8
2. Explain the phenomenon self-induction regarding above experiment (2)
3. Draw the graph with energy and current for a inductor. (1)
Answer:
1. Back emf in the coil.

2. When a.c. current is passed through the coil, a change in flux is produced. This change in flux produces a back e.m.f. in the coil. The phenomena of production of back emf is called self induction.

3. The graph with energy and current for a inductor:
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Four Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Physics Electro Magnetic Induction Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
When AC is switched on the thin metallic disc is found to thrown up in air.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Five Questions and Answers 10

  1. Which makes the disc to thrown?
  2. How will you explain the mechanism behind the movement of disc
  3. Write the working principle of induction heater.

Answer:

  1. Eddy current produced in the coil thrown disc into air.
  2. Whenever the magnetic flux linked with a metal block changes, induced currents are produced due to this current, disc becomes a magnet. Hence disc thrown up in to air.
  3. The change in flux produces eddy current in a metal. The heat produced by eddy current is used for cooking in induction heater.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Electro Magnetic Induction

Question 2.
AC generator is a device based on electromagnetic induction used to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy.

  1. Draw a graph showing variation of induced emf over a cycle. Also indicate peak value of emf. (2)
  2. How peak value of emf is related to its rms value? (1)
  3. A rectangular wire loop of side 4cm × 6cm has 50 turns uniformly from 0.1 Tesla to 0.3 Tesla in 6 × 10-2 second. Calculate induced emf in the coil. (2)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Five Questions and Answers 11

2. Erms = \(\frac{E_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

3.
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Five Questions and Answers 12
and Φ = BAN
Φ1 = 0.1 × (24 × 10-4) × 50
= 120 × 10-4wb
Φ2 = 0.3 × (24 × 10-4) × 50
= 360 × 10-4wb
Plus Two Physics Electromagnetic Induction Five Questions and Answers 13
= 40 × 10-2V.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs

Students can Download Chapter 3 Production and Costs Questions and Answers, Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs

Plus Two Economics Production and Costs One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which among the following cost curves is not ‘U’ shaped?
Answer:
AFC curve is rectangular hyperbola.

Question 2.
Identify the shape of the following AFC curve?
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img1
The shape of AFC curve is rectangular hyperbola.

Question 3.
When a firm increased the number of labour from 10 to 11, keeping the capital fixed the total product increased from 120 to 130. Which of the following statement is correct in this regard?
(a) The total product fell
(b) This is a long run production
(c) The average product is rising
(d) 10 is the marginal product of an increased unit of labour.
Answer:
(d) 10 is the marginal product of an increased unit of labour.

Question 4.
Slope of an isoquant is:
(a) marginal cost
(b) DMRS
(c) DMRTS
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) DMRTS

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
When MP becomes zero, TP:
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) becomes maximum
(d) becomes negative
Answer:
(c) becomes maximum

Question 6.
Which among the following is not ‘u’ shape
(a) MC
(b) AC
(c) AVC
(d) AFC
Answer:
(d) AFC

Question 7.
When AC is minimum
(a) MC > AC
(b) MC = AC
(c) MC < AC
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) MC = AC

HSSLive.Guru

Question 8.
All the following curves are U shaped except
(a) the AVC curve
(b) the AFC curve
(c) the AC curve
(d) the MC curve
Answer:
(b) the AFC curve

Plus Two Economics Production and Costs Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Let the production function of a firm be Q = 5 L1/2 K1/2
Find the maximum output that the firm can produce with 100 units of L and 100 units of K.
Answer:
The production function is
Q = 5 L1/2 K1/2
Since the firm uses 100 units of L and 100 units of
K, we get the production function as
Q = 5 × 1001/2 1001/2
Q = 5 × 10x 10
Q = 5 × 100 = 500

Question 2.
Derive marginal product and average product from the total product schedule.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img2
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img3

Question 3.
Find the maximum possible output for a firm with zero units of labour and 10 units of capital when its production function is
Q = 5L + 2K
Answer:
The production function is Giving the values of L and K, we get
Q = 5 × 0 + 2 × 10
Q = 0 + 20 = 20

HSSLive.Guru

Question 4.
“In the long run, all costs are variable”. Do you agree? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. In the long run, all costs are variable. This is because there is sufficient time available in the long run for any factor of production to get increased. As there are only variable factors, in the long run, all costs are variable.

Question 5.
“The AVC is U shaped” explain the reasons for the ‘U’ shape of AVC curve. Also, draw a diagram to clarify your points.
Answer:
The SMC and AVC curves start rising when production starts. As output increases, SMC falls. AVC being the average of marginal costs also falls but falls less than SMC. Then after a point, SMC start rising. AVC, however, continues to fall as long as value of SMC remains less than the prevailing value of AVC.

Once the SMC has risen sufficiently its value becomes greater than the value of AVC. The AVC starts rising. Therefore, the AVC curve is “U” shaped. It is given in the following diagram.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img4

Question 6.
TFC of a firm is ₹2,000 and TVC is ₹3,000. It produces 20 units. Calculate the AVC and AC of the firm.
Answer:
TC = TFC + TVC
AC = 5000/20 = 250
AVC = 3000/20 = 150

Question 7.
Can there be some fixed cost in the long run?
Answer:
No, there cannot be some fixed cost in the long run. This is because, in the long run all factors of production can be adjusted and variable.

Question 8.
Let the production function of a firm be Q = 10 L1/2 K1/2 Find out the maximum possible output that the firm can produce with 100 units of L and 100 units of K.
Answer:
The production function is,
Q = 10 L1/2 K1/2
L =100 units
K =100 units
∴ Q = 10 × 1001/2 × 1001/2
= 10 × (10²)1/2 × (10²)1/2
= 10 × 10 × 10
= 1,000 units

HSSLive.Guru

Question 9.
The table given below shows the total product schedule of labour. Determine the AP and MP of labour?
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img5
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img6

Question 10.
Prove that AC is the sum of AFC and AVC.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img7

Question 11.
A bus company started its operation with two buses, four labourers. It has paid a one-time road tax. As the passengers increased the company arranged more tripes, with the help of additional labour and for using more fuels. Classify the costs incurred by the bus company into fixed and variable.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img8

Question 12.
Both short run and long run average and marginal cost curves are U-shaped. But reasons for the U-shape are not the same. Bring out the differences.
Answer:
Behaviour of output in the short run as explained by the law of variable proportions Behaviour of output in the long run as explained by the laws of returns to scale.

Plus Two Economics Production and Costs Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img9
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img10

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
Categorize the following into fixed cost
(a) wages of temporary workers
(b) cost of raw materials
(c) salary of permanent staff
(d) cost of transportation
(e) cost of plant
Answer:

Fixed CostVariable Cost
Salary of permanent staffCost of raw materials
Cost.of acquiring landCost of transportation
Cost of plantWages of temporary workers

Question 3.
Identify the following curves.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img10.
Answer:

  1. TC
  2. TVC
  3. TFC

Question 4.
Identify the shapes of the following cost curves.

  1. AFC
  2. AC
  3. TFC
  4. TVC
  5. TC

Answer:

  1. AFC – Rectangular hyperbola
  2. AC – ‘U’shape
  3. TFC – Straight line parallel to X axis
  4. TVC – Inverse‘S’ shape
  5. TC – Inverse‘S’ shape

Question 5.
There exists vertical distance between 1. TVC and TC and (b) TC and TFC. What does this distance indicate?

  1. TVC and TC
  2. TC and TFC

Answer:

  1. The vertical distance between TVC and TC represents the Total Fixed Costs (TFC).
  2. The vertical distance between TC and TFC represents the Total Variable Costs (TVC)

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
Complete the following table
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img11
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img12

Question 7.
Name the following curves. ,
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img13
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img14

Question 8.
What do you mean by an ‘isoquant’?
Answer:
An isoquant is the set of all possible combinations of the two inputs that yield the same maximum possible level of output. Each isoquant represents a particular level of output and is labelled with that amount of output. The shape of isoquant is drawn below.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img15

Question 9.
With the help of a diagram show the relation between average exists and average variable cost.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img16
Answer:
Both AC and AVC are U shaped. As the output increases the gap between AC and AVC narrows.

Question 10.
In the short run, Total Variable Cost is zero when output is zero. When output rises, Total Cost also rises. Draw a suitable diagram and explain the relationship between Total Fixed Cost, Total Variable Cost and Total Cost.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img17

HSSLive.Guru

Question 11.
“Average Fixed Cost (AFC) curve is a continuously falling curve.”

  1. Substantiate this statement by giving the reasons.
  2. Graphically represent the AFC curve

Answer:
1. TFC is constant & hence AFC falls
2.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img18

Plus Two Economics Production and Costs Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The marginal product and total product of an input are related’. Prove this statement.’
Answer:
The marginal product (MP) and total product (TP) of an input are related. The points of relationship are given below.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img19

  1. When MP increases, TP also increases
  2. When MP is zero, TP becomes maximum
  3. When MP becomes negative, TP turns negative

Question 2.
Differentiate between returns to a factor and returns to scale.
Answer:
Returns to a factor refers to the effects on output of changes in one input with all other inputs are hold constant. On the other hand, returns to scale refers to the effect on total output of charges in some constant rate in all the inputs simultaneously.

Question 3.
The marginal cost and average cost are related to each other. Prove this using diagram and a numerical example?
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img20
Marginal cost are addition made to the total costs by the production of an additional unit of the commodity.
MC = TCn – TCn-1

Average lost is per unit cost of production which is obtained by dividing the total cost by number of units of output produced.
\(A C=\frac{T C}{Q}\)

Since AC is obtained by dividing TC by all units, MC is the addition to TC by producing an additional unit so MC brings a change in AC.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img21
From above:

  1. When MC is less than AC, then MC will fall
  2. When MC is equal to AC, AC remains costant.
  3. When MC is more than AC, AC rises

HSSLive.Guru

Question 4.
Which of the following represent the long run production function?
1. MC is less than AC, then MC will fall

  • Law of variable proportion
  • Returns to scale

2.  Explain what may happen when all inputs vary simultaneously?
Answer:
Returns to scale.
When all inputs are varied simultaneously the output may change in three ways.
1. Constant returns to scale:
It is when a proportional increase in inputs result in an increase in output by the same proportion.

2. Increasing returns to scale:
It is when a proportional increase in all inputs result in an increase in output by more than proportion.

3. Decreasing returns to scale:
It is when a proportional increase in all inputs result in an increase in output by less than proportion

Question 5.
State whether the statement are true or false.

  1. TC never becomes zero.
  2. AC is sum total of AFC and AVC.
  3. When AC rises, AC and MC are equal
  4. Real cost is the cost in money terms
  5. TFC curve is U shaped

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True
  3. False
  4. False
  5. False

Question 6.
The following table shows the total cost schedule of a firm. What is the total fixed cost schedule of the firm? Calculate the JVC, AFC, AVC, SAC and SMC of the firm
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img22
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img23

Question 7.
The diagram shows the total product curve of a factor in the law of variable proportion.

  1. Explain the law
  2. With the help of a diagram illustrate the average and marginal product curve and their relation.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img24
Answer:
1. Law of variable proportion says that if one variable input is added with other fixed inputs the marginal product of a factor input initially rises but after reaching a certain level of output it starts falling.

2. The relation between the average and marginal product is given below. BothAPand MPare ‘n ’shaped. MPwill always pass through the maximum of AP.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img25

HSSLive.Guru

Question 8.
Theory of production deals with producer’s behaviour, and according to this theory output produced by a firm passes through three stages in the short run.

  1. Which are the three stages of production?
  2. Analyse and bring out the salient features of each stage.
  3. Which stage of production is very important as far as a firm is concerned? Why?
  4. Give suitable diagram by drawing the Total Prod-uct, Average Product & Marginal Product curves.

Answer:

1. Increasing, diminishing and negative
2. First output increases at increasing rate, then at diminishing rate & finally starts falling.
3. Second stage, profit maximisation occurs in this Stage.
4.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img26

Question 9.
If other things remaining same, graphically explain what happens to the supply curve for readymade shirts if there is

  1. An increase in the wages paid to the tailors.
  2. An increase in the price of ready-made shirts

Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img27

Plus Two Economics Production and Costs Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a seminar report on the topic “Production Function.”
Answer:
Respected teachers and dear friends:
The topic of my seminar paper is “Production Function”. The production function of a firm shows relationship between inputs and output. In this seminar paper, I would like to present the different production functions such as short run production function and the long run production function.

Introduction:
As we know the production function shows the transformation of inputs into output. The production function can be of two types – short run production function known as Law of Variable proportion and the long run production function known as returns to scale. Q =F(F1 F2… Fn)

Contents:
A. Law of Variable proportion

  1. Increasing returns
  2. Diminishing returns
  3. Negative returns

A. The Law of Variable Proportions
When more and more units of a variable input are added with the fixed input, the marginal product would increase only upto a certain point. Therefore, the marginal product declines. This phenomenon is known as the Law of Variable Proportions. It is also known as returns to a factor.

The shape of TP, AP and MP suggests that they are specifically passing through three phases.
They are:
1. First phase:
In the first stage, both AP and MP increase. As a result TP also increases at an increasing rate. This stage is known as the stage of increasing return to a factor. AP reaches the maximum level in this stage.

2. Second phase:
Both AP and MP decrease at this stage. The TP increases at a decreasing rate. More importantly, TP reaches maximum and MP touches zero. This stage is also known as the stage of diminishing returns to a factor.

HSSLive.Guru

3. Third phase:
At this stage, the MP becomes negative. As a result, TP also starts declining. The decline of AP is continuous. In the graph, when TP reaches maximum and MP touches zero. When MP becomes negative, TP starts declining. This stage is known as the stage of negative returns to a factor.

B. Returns to scale

  1. Increasing returns
  2. Constant returns
  3. Decreasing returns
    (for details, refer summary part)

B. Returns to scale
As stated earlier, all the factor inputs become variable in the long run and thereby no distinction can be made between fixed inputs and variable inputs. Return to scale is associated with long run production function.

Returns to scale refers to the change in output when all inputs are variable and the proportion between inputs remains constant. When all the inputs vary in the same proportion, the output (TP) behaves in different manner, which can be clubbed into three categories.

1. Increasing Returns to Scale (IRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to more than proportionate change in output, it is known as the stage of increasing returns to scale. For instance, a 10% change in inputs results in more than 10% change in output.

2. Constant Returns to Scale (CRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to change in output in the same proportion is known as the stage of constant returns to scale. It indicates that a 10% change in inputs leads to exactly 10% change in output.

3. Decreasing Returns to Scale (DRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to less than proportionate change in output is known as the stage of decreasing returns to scale. It indicates that a 10% change in inputs leads to less than 10% change in output.

Conclusion:
Thus it can be concluded that there are two types of production function depending upon the use of inputs and the time period.

Question 2.
Prepare a seminar paper on Law of Returns to Scale.
Answer:
Returns to scale:
As stated earlier, all the factor inputs become variable in the long run and thereby no distinction can be made between fixed inputs and variable inputs. Return to scale is associated with long run production function.

Returns to scale refers to the change in output when all inputs are variable and the proportion between inputs remains constant. When all the inputs vary in the same proportion, the output (TP) behaves in different manner, which can be clubbed into three categories.

1. Increasing Returns to Scale (IRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to more than proportionate change in output, it is known as the stage of increasing returns to scale. For instance, a 10 percentage change in inputs results in more than 10 percentage change in output.

2. Constant Returns to Scale (CRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to change in output in the same proportion is known as the stage of constant returns to scale. It indicates that a 10 percentage change in inputs leads to exactly 10 percentage change in output.

3. Decreasing Returns to Scale (DRS):
When a proportionate change in all the inputs leads to less than proportionate change in output is known as the stage of decreasing returns to scale. It indicates that a 10 percentage change in inputs leads to less than 10 percentage change in output.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 3.
From the table given below
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img28

  1. Fill the blank columns
  2. Using the information in the table draw TC, TVC, TFC in one and AC, AVC, AFC, MC in other and prepare a short note on them.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Production and Costs img29
2. Use the data to draw the diagram.
TC, TVC and TFC represent total costs. TC = TFC + TVC. TFC is the cost incurred on fixed factors. TVC is the cost incurred on variable costs. Even though the level of output is zero there will be some costs. This is known as fixed cost. When the level of output is zero total variable costs also will be zero.

It will increase as the level of output increases. AFC is the cost that always falls. It is a rectangular hyperbola. AVC, AC, MC are ‘U’ shaped. The MC will always pass through the minimum oftheAVCand AC.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Students can Download Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Plus Two Chemistry Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The reaction Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids one mark q1 img 1 is called
(a) Sandmeyer’s reaction
(b) Rosenmund’s reduction
(c) HVZ reaction
(d) Cannizaro’s reaction
Answer:
(b) Rosenmund’s reduction

Question 2.
Say TRUE or FALSE:
Aldol condensation is given by all aldehydes and ketones.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
A 40% solution of _________ is called formation
Answer:
formaldehyde (HCHO)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 4.
Benzamide on heating with bromine and caustic alkali gives
(a) benzene
(b) methylamine and benzene
(c) aniline
(d) m-Bromobenzaldehyde
Answer:
(c) aniline

Question 5.
In the reaction Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids one mark q5 img 2 the product ‘B’ is
(a) acetanilide
(b) glycine
(c) ammonium acetate
(d) methane
Answer:
(b) glycine

Question 6.
Arrange the following in the decreasing order of acidity.
ClCH2COOH, Cl3CCOOH, CH3COOH, Cl2HCOOH
Answer:
Cl3CCOOH > Cl2CHCOOH > ClCH2COOH > CH3COOH

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 7.
Reaction of butanone with methyl magnesium bromiode followed by hydrolysis gives_________
Answer:
2 methyl -2- butanol

Question 8.
The major product of the addition of water molecule to propyne in the presence of mercuric sulphate and dil sulphuric acid is ________
Answer:
Propanone

Question 9.
One mole of propanone and one mole of formalde¬hyde are the products of ozonolysis of one mole of an alkene. The alkene is ________
Answer:
2 methyl propene

Question 10.
Which of the following is a better reducing agent for the following reduction.
RCOOH → RCH2OH
(a) SnCI2/HCI
(b) NaBH4/ether
(c) H2/pd
(d) N2H4/C2H5ONa
(e) B2H6/H3O+
Answer:
(e) B2H6/H3O+

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 11.
The total number of acyclic structural isomers possible for compound with molecular formula C4H10O is ________
Answer:
7

Plus Two Chemistry Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Reactivity of ketone is less than that of aldehyde. Why?
Answer:
Due to steric hindrance and inductive effect of alkyl group.

Question 2.
Carboxylic acid decompose into carboxylate ion and H+ ion.

  1. Explain this on the basis of resonating structure of carboxylic acid.
  2. Arrange the following in the increasing order of acidity. HCOOH, CH3COOH
  3. Substantiate.

Answer:

  1. Carboxylic acid decomposes to give proton and carboxylate ion and is stabilized by resonance. This explains the acidic character of carboxylic acid.
  2. CH3COOH < HCOOH
  3. In acetic acid the electron donating effect (+l – effect) of -CH3 group destabilises the carboxylate anion and decreases the acid strength. Whereas in formic acid the H atom has not electron withdrawing or electron donating effect.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 3.
What is Etard’s reaction?
Answer:
Etard’s reaction:
When toluene is oxidized using chromyl chloride, benzaldehyde is obtained.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q3 img 3

Question 4.
What is HVZ reaction? Explain.
Answer:
HVZ reaction – When a carboxylic acid is treated with red P and halogen, the α-H atoms are successively replaced by halogen.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q4 img 4
This reaction has great synthetic importance as the halogen atom can be replaced by a number of other groups giving useful products.

Question 5.
Predict the product and name the reaction:

  1. HCHO + NaOH → B + C
  2. CH3COOH + CH3OH → E

Answer:

  1. CH3OH + HCOONa – Cannizzaro reaction
  2. CH3COOCH3 – Esterification

Question 6.
Write the name of any two tests to distinguish between acetaldehyde and acetone.
Answer:
Benedict’s test, Fehling’s test – Both tests are answered by acetaldehyde and not by aceotne.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 7.
An organic compound with molecular formula C9H10O forms 2, 4-DNP derivative, reduces Tollens’reagent and undergoes Cannizzaro reaction. On vigorous oxidation, it gives 1, 2-benzenedicarboxylic acid. Identify the compound.
Answer:
From the given data it is clear that as the compound forms2, 4-DNP derivative it has /CO group. Since it reduces Tollens’ reagent therefore -CHO group is present. As it can also undergo Cannizzaro reaction therefore α -hydrogen is absent
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q7 img 5
The oxidation product suggests that the compound has a benzene ring. One of the – COOH groups have been obtained by the oxidation of – CHO group and the other from alkyl group. Hence on these basis, the structure of C9H10O is
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q7 img 6

Question 8.
Write a notes on

  1. Reimer – Tiemann reaction
  2. Rosenmund Reduction

Answer:
1. Reimer – Tiemman reaction: When phenol is heated with CHCI3 at 340 K, o-hydroxy benzaldehyde or salicylaldehyde is obtained.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q8 img 7

2. Rosenmund reduction: When an acid chloride is reduced by using hydrogen gas in presence of Pd and BaSO4, an aldehyde is obtained.
OR
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q8 img 8

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 9.
Distinguish the following compounds using any one test.
H3C – CO – CH3 and CH3CH2CHO
Answer:
CH3COCH3 give Iodoform test which CH3CHO does not answer this test.

Question 10.
Aspirin is commonly used in medicine. How it is prepared? Give the equation.
Answer:
Aspirin is acetyl salicyclic acid. When salicyclic acid is treated with acetyl chloride, aspirin is obtained.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q10 img 9
Salicylic acid + acetyl chloride → Aspirin

Question 11.
How will you prepare CH3-CO-NH2 and CH3COOCH3 from CH3COOH?
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q11 img 10

Question 12.
Give the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
i) C6H5CH = CHCHO
ii) (CH3)3CCH2COOH
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q12 img 11

Question 13.
Give a test to distinguish between acetaldehyde and acetone.
Answer:
CH3 – CO – CH3 contains CH3CO – group and hence it gives iodoform test.
CH3 – CH2 – CHO does not give iodoform test.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 14.
Predict the major product in the following reactions:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q14 img 12
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids two mark q14 img 13

Question 15.
Distinguish between formaldehyde & acetaldehyde.
Answer:

HCHOCH3CHO
1. It gives Cannizzaro reaction.1. It doesn’t give Cannizzaro reaction.
2. It doesn’t give aldol condensation.2. It gives aldol condensation.
3. It gives condensation products with NH3.3. It gives addition products with NH3.

Question 16.
Which is more acidic, 2-chloropropanoic acid or 3- chloropropanoicacid? Why?
Answer:
2-chloropropanoic acid. Becasue the electron with drawing -Cl group is more closer to -COOH group in this compound.

Plus Two Chemistry Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q1 img 14
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q1 img 15

Question 2.
A student is given Tollens’ reagent for oxidation of aldehyde.

  1. What is Tollens’ reagent?
  2. Can you help him to do the experiment?
  3. What is the result of the experiment?

Answer:

  1. Tollens’ reagent is ammoniacal silver nitrate solution
  2. Yes. To a little of the solution add Tollens’ reagent
  3. A black precipitate of silver or silver mirror is obtained

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q3 img 16

  1. What is the role of LiAIH4?
  2. Give one example of an oxidising agent?
  3. What is the action of a carboxylic acid with alcohol?

Answer:

  1. LiAIH4 is a strong reducing agent. It reduces RCOOH to 1° alcohol (RCH2OH)
  2. Acidified KMnO4.
  3. When carboxylic acid is treated with an alcohol in the presence of dehydrating agent like conc.H2SO4, an ester is formed. This is called esterification reaction.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q3 img 17

Question 4.
What happens when primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are passed over red hot copper? Give equations.
Answer:
1° alcohol hot copper Aldehyde
2° alcohol over hot copper – Ketone
3° alcohol over hot copper- alkene
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q4 img 18

Question 5
Fill in the blanks.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q5 img 19
Answer:

  1. HVZ reaction
  2. CH3CH3
  3. Hoffmann bromamide degradation reaction
  4. HCOONa + CH3OH
  5. Reimer-Tiemann reaction
  6. C6H5Cl

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 6.
Draw the structure of the following derivatives.
(i) The 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of benzaldehyde
(ii) Cyclopropanone oxime
(iii) Acetaldehydedimethylacetal
(iv) The semicarbazone of cyclobutanone
(v) The ethylene ketal of hexan-3-one
(vi) The methyl hemiacetal of formaldehyde
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q6 img 20

Question 7.

i) 2HCHO + NaOH → CH3OH + HCOONa
ii) Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q7 img 21

(a) Identify Cannizzaro and Aldol condensation.
(b) What is the difference between the above two reactions?

Answer:
(a) Cannizzaro reaction:
2HCHO + NaOH CH3OH + HCOONa
Aldol condensation:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q7 img 22
(b) Cannizzaro reaction is given by aldehydes having no α-H atom whereas aldol condensation is given by aldehydes containing α-H atom.

Question 8.
a) In a practical class a group of students heated ethanal with NaOH. Another group heated methanal with conc.NaOH.
i) Identify the products in each reaction with equation.
ii) Name the reactions.
b) Aldehydes are more reactive than ketones. Comment on the statement.
Answer:
a)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids three mark q8 img 23
ii) The first reaction is Cannizarro reaction and the second reaction is aldol condensation.

b) Due to the ‘+l’ effect and steric hindrance of surrounding alkyl group ketones are less reactive than aldehydes.

Plus Two Chemistry Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
i) Arrange the following in the increasing order of acidic strength and justify your answer.
CH3COOH, CHCI2COOH, CH2CICOOH, CCI3COOH

ii) Suggest a method to convert acetic acid to chloroacetic acid. Name the reaction and write the chemical equation.
Answer:
i) CH3COOH < CH2CI-COOH < CHCI2COOH < CCI3COOH This is due to the electron withdrawing character of chlorine.

ii) HVZ reaction – When a carboxylic acid is treated with red P and halogen, the a-H atoms are successively replaced by halogen.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q1 img 24
This reaction has great synthetic importance as the halogen atom can be replaced by a number of other groups giving useful products.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 2.
a) Which of the following carbonyl compounds answer aldol condensation reaction and give equation.
HCHO, CH3CHO, CCI3CHO, C6H6-CHO

b) Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of acidity:
CH3COOH, CH2CICOOH, CH3-CH2-COOH, C6H5-COOH
Answer:
a) Among these compounds only CH3CHO answer aldol condensation reaction. Others will not answer this reaction because they have no α – hydrogen atom.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q2 img 25

Question 3.

  1. Aldehydes and ketones are carbonyl compounds Give a test for identification of aldehydes.
  2. Acidic strength is related to the stability of carboxylate anion. Which acid of each pair is stronger?

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q3 img 26
Answer:
1. Benedict test. Benedict reagent is a mixture of sodium carbonate and sodium citrate. This on reaction with aldehyde gives red precipitate of Cu2S.

2. Acidic strength is related to the stability of carboxylate anion. Acid of each pair is stronger:
i) CH2FCOOH. This is due to the high electron with drawing effect of F.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q3 img 27
This is due to the high electron with drawing effect of the -CF3 group.

Question 4.
Substituents on carboxylic acids have much effect on their acidity. Substantiate the statement with the following examples.
a) HCOOH, CH3COOH, CH2CICOOH
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q4 img 28
Answer:
CH2CICOOH > HCOOH > CH3COOH
The methyl group will intensify the negative charge on the carboxylate ion and destabilise it as compared to formate ion. So HCOOH is stronger than CH3COOH. The electron withdrawing effect of a Cl makes chloroacetic acid stronger than HCOOH and CH3COOH.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q4 img 29

In the case of aromatic carboxylic acids, presence of electron withdrawing groups at ortho and para position increases their acidity while presence of electron donating groups decreases their acidity.

In 4-nitro benzonic acid acid strength is greater than that of benzoic acid due to the electron withdrawing nature of -NO2 group while in 4-methoxy benzoic acid acid strength decreases due to the electron donating nature of the methoxy group.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 5.
Give a chemical test to distinguish between each of
the following pair of organic compounds.

  1. Propanal and Propanol
  2. Propanone and Propanal

Answer:

1. Propanal is an aldehyde and it gives a silver mirror with Tollens’ reagent while propanol is an alcohol and will not answer Tollens’test.

2. Propanone gives yellow precipitate of iodoform on reaction with I2 and NaOH while propanal does not give iodoform test. OR Propanal gives silver mirror with Tollens’ reagent while propanone does not give silver mirror test.

Question 6.
What is meant by the following terms? Give an example of the reaction in each case.

  1. Cyanohydrin
  2. Acetal
  3. Semicarbazone
  4. Aldol
  5. Hemiacetal
  6. Oxime
  7. Ketal
  8. Imine
  9. 2,4-DNP-derivative
  10. Schiff’s base

Answer:
1. Cyanohydrin – It is a compound which contain both OH and CN groups. For example, Lactic acid can be obtained by hydrolysis of cyanohydrin.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 30

2. Acetal – compounds formed by the reaction of aldehydes with monohydric alcohols in presence of dry HCI gas.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 31

3. Semicarbazone – the product of carbonyl compounds with semicarbazide is known as semicarbazone.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 32

4. Aldol – It is a condensation product of aldehydes or ketones having atleast one α – hydrogen atom with dilute alkali as catalyst.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 33
5. Hemiacetal – It is a compound which contains an ether as well as alcohol functional group. For example, methoxyethanol is a hemiacetal.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 34
6. Oxime – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with hydroxylamine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 35

7. Ketal – It is a cyclic compound obtained by reaction of aceone with ethylene glycol.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 36

8. Imine – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with ammonia.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 37

9. 2, 4-DNP derivative – 2, 4-phenylhydrazone (DNP) is the addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehydes and ketones with 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 38

10. Schiff’s base – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with amine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 39

Question 7.
Name the following compounds according to IUPAC system of nomenclature.

  1. CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH2CHO
  2. CH3CH2COCH(C2H5)CH2CH2CI
  3. CH3CH=CHCHO
  4. CH3COCH2COCH3
  5. CH3CH(CH3)CH2C(CH3)2COCH3
  6. (CH3)2CCH2COOH
  7. OHCC6H5CHO-p

Answer:

  1. 4-Methylpentanal
  2. 6-Chloro-4-ethylhexan-3-one
  3. But-2-enal
  4. Pentane-2,4-dione
  5. 3, 3, 5-Trimethylhexane-3-one
  6. 3, 3-Dimethylbutanoicacid
  7. Benzene 1, 4-dicarbaldehyde

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 8.

  1. What is the relation between an electron donating group and acidic character?
  2. How carboxylic acids maintain their acid character?

Answer:

  1. Electron donating group decreases the acid character.
  2. Carboxylic acid decomposes to give proton and carboxylate ion and is stabilized by resonance. This explains the acidic character of carboxylic acid.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q8 img 40

Question 9.
Predict the product formed when cyclohexane carbaldehyde reacts with following reagents:
i) PhMgBr and then H3O+
ii) Tollens’reagent
iii) Semicarbazide and weak acid
iv) Excess ethanol and acid
v) Zinc amalgam and dilute hydrochloric acid
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q9 img 41

Plus Two Chemistry Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What is meant by the following terms? Give an example of the reaction in each case

  1. Cyanohydrin
  2. Acetal
  3. Semicarbazone
  4. Aldol
  5. Hemiacetal
  6. Oxime
  7. Ketal
  8. Imine
  9. 2,4-DNP-derivative
  10. Schiff’s base

Answer:
1. Cyanohydrin – It is a compound which contain both OH and CN groups. For example, Lactic acid can be obtained by hydrolysis of cyanohydrin.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark q6 img 40

2. Acetal – compounds formed by the reaction of aldehydes with monohydric alcohols in presence of dry HCI gas.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 41

3. Semicarbazone – the product of carbonyl compounds with semicarbazide is known as semicarbazone.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 42

4. Aldol – It is a condensation product of aldehydes or ketones having atleast one α – hydrogen atom with dilute alkali as catalyst.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 43

5. Hemiacetal – It is a compound which contains an ether as well as alcohol functional group. For example, methoxyethanol is a hemiacetal.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 44

6. Oxime – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with hydroxylamine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 45

7. Ketal – It is a cyclic compound obtained by reaction of aceone with ethylene glycol.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 46

8. Imine – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with ammonia.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 47

9. 2, 4-DNP derivative – 2, 4-phenylhydrazone (DNP) is the addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehydes and ketones with 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 48

10. Schiff’s base – Addition compound formed by the reaction of aldehyde or ketone with amine.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 49

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 2.
Name the following compounds according to IUPAC system of nomenclature.

  1. CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH2CHO
  2. CH3CH2COCH(C2H5)CH2CH2CI
  3. CH3CH = CHCHO
  4. CH3COCH2COCH3
  5. CH3CH(CH3)CH2C(CH3)2COCH3
  6. (CH3)3CCH2COOH
  7. OHCC6H5CHO-p

Answer:

  1. 4-Methylpentanal
  2. 6-Chloro-4-ethylhexan-3-one
  3. But-2-enal
  4. Pentane-2,4-dione
  5. 3, 3, 5-Trimethylhexane-3-one
  6. 3, 3-Dimethylbutanoicacid
  7. Benzene 1, 4-dicarbaldehyde

Question 3.
Draw the structure of the following compounds
(i) 3-Methylbutanal
(ii) p-Nitropropiophenone
(iii) p-methylbenzaldehyde
(iv) 4-methylpent-3-en-2-one
(v) 3-bromo-4-phenylpentanoicacid
(vi) 4-Chloropentan-2-one
(vii) p, p-Dihydroxybenzophenone
(viii) Hex-2-en-4-ynoicacid
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 50

Question 4.
An organic compound with molecular formula C9H10O forms 2, 4-DNP derivative, reduces Tollens’reagent and undergoes Cannizzaro reaction. On vigorous oxidation, it gives 1, 2-benzene dicarboxylic acid. Identify the compound.
Answer:
From the given data it is clear that as the compound forms 2, 4-DNP derivative it has >CO group. Since it reduces Tollens’ reagent -CHO group is present. As it can also undergo Cannizzaro reaction α- hydrogen is absent.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 51
The oxidation product suggests that the compound has a benzene ring. One of the – COOH groups have been obtained by the oxidation of – CHO group and the other from alkyl group. Hence on these basis, the structure of C9H10O is
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 52

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 5.
Write structural formulas and names of the four possible aldol condensation products from propanal and butanal. In each case, indicate which aldehyde served as nucleophile and which as electrophile.
Answer:
i) Propanal as electrophile as well as nucleophile
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 53

ii) Propanal as electrophile and butanal as nucleophile
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 54
iii) Butanal as electrophile and propanal as nucleophile
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 55

iv) Butanal as electrophile as well as nucleophile
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 56

Question 6.
Predict the product formed when cyclohexane carbaldehyde reacts with following reagents:
i) PhMgBr and then H3O+
ii) Tollens’reagent
iii) Semicarbazide and weak acid
iv) Excess ethanol and acid
v) Zinc amalgam and dilute hydrochloric acid
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 57

Question 7.
Give simple chemical tests to distinguish between

  1. Propanal and propanone
  2. Acetophenone and Benzophenone
  3. Phenol and Benzoic acid
  4. Benzaldehyde and acetophenone
  5. Ethanal and propanal

Answer:
1. Propanal and propanone:
Propanal and propanone can be distinguished by iodoform test as it is given by propanone and not by propanal
Propanone reacts with hot NaOH/I2 to give yellow precipitate of iodoform.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 58

2. Acetophenone and benzophenone:
Acetophenone gives iodoform test but benzophenone does not respond.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 59

3. Phenol and benzoic acid:
This can be distinguished by treating FeCI3 solution. Phenol gives violet colour with FeCI3 solution while benzoic acid gives buff colured precipitate.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 60

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

4. Benzaldehyde and acetophenone:
Acetophenone responds to iodoform test while benzaldehyde does not.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 61
5. Ethanal and propanal:
Ethanal gives yellow ppt. of iodoform with an alkaline solution of iodine (iodoform test)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 62
Propanal does not give yellow ppt.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids four mark 63

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Students can Download Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Answer the following questions regarding earth’s magnetism:

  1. A vector needs three quantities for its specification. Name the three independent quantities conventionally used to specify the earth’s magnetic field.
  2. The angle of dip at a location in southern India is about 18°. Would you expect a greater or lesser dip angle in Britain?
  3. If you make a map of magnetic field lines at Melbourne in Australia, would the lines seen to go into the ground or come out of the ground?
  4. In which direction would a compass free to move in the vertical plane point to, if located right on the geomagnetic north or south pole?
  5. The earth’s field is claimed roughly approximately, the field due to a dipole magnetic moment 8 × 1022 JT-1 located at the centre. Check your or¬der of magnitude of this number same way.
  6. Geologists claim that besides the main magnetic NS poles, there are several local poles on the earth’s surface oriented in different directions. How is such a thing possible at all?

Answer:
1. Magnetic declination, angle of dip, horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.

2. Greater angle of dip in Britain, (it is about 70°), because Britain is closer to the magnetic north pole.

3. Field lines of B due to the earth’s magnetism would seem to come out of the ground.

4. A compass is free to move in a horizontal plane, while the earth’s field is exactly vertical at the magnetic poles. So the compass can point in any direction there.

5. Use the formula for field B on the normal bisector of a dipole of magnetic moment m.
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{M}{r^{3}}\)
Take M = 8 × 1022 JT-1
r = 6.4 × 106 m;
one gets B = 0.3G
which checks with the orde of magnitude of the observed field on the earth.

6. The earth’s field is only approximately a dipole field. Local N-S poles may arise due to, for instance, magnetized minerals deposits.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
A short bar magnet of magnetic moment m = 0.32JT-1 is placed in a uniform external magnetic field of 0.15T. If the bar is free to rotate in the plane of the field, which orientations would correspond to its

  • stable and
  • unstable equilibrium? What is the potential energy of the magnet in each case?

Answer:
Given M=0.32JT-1 B = 0.15T, U = ?

  • If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}} \| \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\), then we have stable equilibrium and U = -MB = -0.32 × 0.15T = -4.8 × 10-2 J
  • If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{M}}\) is anti-parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) , we have unstable equilibrium and
    U = MB = 0.32 × 0.15J = 4.8 × 10-2J

Question 3.
A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and area of cross-section 2.5 × 10-4 m2 carries a current of 3.0A. Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar magnet. What is its associated magnetic moment?
Answer:
Given N = 800, A = 2.5 × 10-4 m2, I = 3.0A, M = ?
Since M = NIA
∴ M = 800 × 3 × 2.5 × 10-4
or M = 0.60JT-1 along the axis of the solenoid.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 4.
A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and area of cross-section 1.6 × 10-4 m2, carrying a current of 4.0A, is suspended through its centre allowing it to turn in a horizontal plane.

  1. What is the magnetic moment associated with the solenoid?
  2. What is the force and torque on the solenoid if a uniform horizontal magnetic field of 7.5 × 10-2 is set up at an angle of 30° with the axis of the sole¬noid?

Answer:
1. Magnetic dipole moment,
M = nIA
= 2000 × 4.0 × 1.6 × 10-4 = 1.28JT-1

2. Net force = 0
Torque, τ = MB sinθ
= 1.28 × 7.5 × 10-2 × sin 30°
= 1.28 × 7.5 × 10-3 × 1/2 = 4.8 × 10-2 Nm.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 5.
Answer the following questions:

  1. Why does a paramagnetic sample display greater magnetization (for the same magnetizing field) when cooled?
  2. Why is diamagnetism, in contrast, almost independent of temperature?
  3. If a toroid used bismuth for its core, will the field in the core be (slightly) greater or (slightly) less than when the core is empty?
  4.  If the permeability of a ferromagnetic material independent of the magnetic field? If not is it more for lower or higher fields?
  5. Magnetic field lines are always nearly normal to the surface of a ferromagnet at every point.
  6. Would the maximum possible magnetisation of a paramagnetic sample be of the same order of magnitude as the magnetisation of a ferromagnet?

Answer:
1. The tendency to disrupt the alignment of dipoles (with the magnetising field) arising from random thermal motion is reduced at lower temperatures.

2. The induced dipole moment in a diamagnetic sample is always opposite to the magnetising field, no matter what the internal motion of the atom is.

3. Slightly less, since bismuth is diamagnetic.

4. No, as is evident from the magnetisation curve. From the slope of the magnetisation curve, it is clear that μ is greater for lower fields.

5. Proof of the important fact (of much practical use) is based on boundary conditions of magnetic fields (B & H) at the interface of two media. (When one of the media has μ>>1, the field lines meet this medium nearly normally).

6. Yes. Apart from minor differences in the strength of the individual atomic dipoles of two different materials, a paramagnetic sample with saturated magnetisation will have the same order of magnetisation. But of course, saturation requires impractically high magnetising fields.

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room temperature. If the temperature is increased beyond Curie temperature, then it will show
(a) anti ferromagnetism
(b) no magnetic property
(c) diamagnetism
(d) paramagnetism
Answer:
(d) paramagnetism

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
According to Curie’s law, the magnetic susceptibility of a substance at an absolute temperature T is proportional to
(a) 1/T
(b) T
(c) 1/T2
(d) T2
Answer:
(a) 1/T
Explanation : According to Curie’s law X ∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\)

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 3.
Above Curie temperature
(a) a paramagnetic substance becomes ferromagnetic substance
(b) a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic
(c) a paramagnetic substance becomes diamagnetic
(d) a diamagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic
Answer:
(b) a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Classify the following properties into diamagnetic, paramagnetic and ferromagnetic.

  1. Susceptibility -1≤x<0
  2. In uniform magnetic field it acquires a large magnetisation in the direction of the field.
  3. When it is suspended in a magnetic field, it will come to rest perpendiculartothe magnetic field.
  4. Susceptibility of the substance varies inversely as temperature of the substance upto curie temperature ie. xm∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\)

Answer:

  • Dia – a,c
  • Para – d
  • Ferro – b

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
Classify the following properties into diamagnetism and ferro magnetism.

  1. In non uniform magnetic field, it more from high to law field.
  2. Magnetic field lines are repelled from this material, If we place in a external magnetic field.
  3. susceptibility greater than one, <0, +ve
  4. Iron, Nickel, Cobalt are the examples

Answer:

  1. Diamagnetism
  2. Diamagnetism
  3. Ferro magnetism
  4. Ferro magnetism

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 3.
Fill in the blanks.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Two Mark Questions and Answers 1
Answer:

  1. negative
  2. Weak magnetic field to strong magnetic field.
  3. Individual atoms have tiny magnetic moments
  4. µr >1

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The figure shows hysteresis curves for soft iron and stell.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Three Mark Questions and Answers 2

  1. Which among the two is the hysteresis loop of soft iron?
  2. Which one among the two materials is preferred for use in transformers and galvanometers?
  3. When steel is once magnetized, the magnetiza-tion is not easily destroyed even if it is exposed to strong reverse fields. Give reason.

Answer:

  1. Fig. b
  2. Soft iron
  3. When steel is magnetised the magnetic domains in the material is permanently set and magnetised permanently in the direction of the applied magnetic field.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
The figure shows a liquid placed on the pole pieces of two magnets.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Three Mark Questions and Answers 3

  1. Which magnetic behaviour is exhibited by the liquid? (1)
  2. Write any two characteristics of this magnetic behaviour? (1)
  3. Does this behaviour transform with temperature. Why? (1)

Answer:
1. Diamagnetism
2. characteristics of this magnetic behaviour:

  • Permeability of a diamagnetic material is less than one.
  • Susceptibility is small and negative.

3. No. The magnetic dipole moment induced in the diamagnetic material is opposite to the magnetising field and hence does not affect the thermal motion of atoms. Hence change in temperature has no effect on diamagnetism.

Question 3.
A magnetic material contained in a curved glass plate, when placed in a nonuniform magnetic field, exhibits a property as shown in figure.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Three Mark Questions and Answers 4

  1. Which type of magnetic material is this? Explain the property
  2. Write two examples for such a magnetic material. Explain how the property relates with temperature?
  3. “The susceptibility of a material is small” what do you mean by this statement.

Answer:

  1. Diamagnetism: Diamagnetic materials are repelled from external magnetic field.
  2. Bismuth, Copper, Lead, Nitrogen, Water. Diamagnetism is independent of temperature.
  3. Diamagnetism developed by external magnetic field is very small.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 4.
A place where dip = 90°, BH = 0

  1. This place is at…………
  2. What is the value of Bu at this place?
  3. Can a magnetic needle align in the N-S direction at this place?

Answer:
1. Magnetic pole.

2. B = \(\sqrt{B_{v}^{2}+B_{h}^{2}}\)
But Bh = 0
∴ B = Bv

3. No. Magnetic needle align vertically

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 5.
Classify into diamagnet, Paramagnet and Fero magnet.

  1. Feebly magnetized in the same direction
  2. mr slightly more than none
  3. does not allow lines of force
  4. temperature independent
  5. exhibit hysteresis
  6. strongly attracted by a bar magnet

Answer:

  1. Paramagnet
  2. Para magnet
  3. Dia magnet
  4. Diamagnet
  5. Ferromagnet
  6. Ferromagnet

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Magnetic field lines are the visualization of magnetic field.

  1. Write any three properties of magnetic field lines.
  2. The arrangement shows two bar magnets placed near each other. Draw the magnetic field lines of the system.

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Four Mark Questions and Answers 5
Answer:
1. properties of magnetic field lines:

  • The magnetic field lines of a magnet form continuous closed loops.
  • The tangent to the field line at a given point represents the direction of magnetic field at that point.
  • Flux density of magnetic field represents the strength of magnetic field.
  • The magnetic field lines do not intersect

2.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Four Mark Questions and Answers 6

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

Question 2.
The figure shows the magnetic field of earth.
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Four Mark Questions and Answers 7

  1. Identify the labels A, B, C. (1)
  2. The lines drawn on a map through places that have the same declination are called………(1)
  3. The horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field at a place is 0.25 × 10-4T and the resultant magnetic field is 0.5 × 10-4 T. Find the dip and the vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field at the place. (2)

Answer:
1. the labels A, B, C:

  • A – Magnetic equator
  • B – Magnetic axis
  • C – Declination

2. Isogonic lines

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

3. Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is
BH = B cosδ
0.25 × 10-4 = 0.5 × 10-4 δ
δ = 60°
Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is
Bv = B sin δ = 0.5 × 10-4 sin 60 = 0.43 × 10-4T.

Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
When a magnetic needle is placed in a non-uniform magnetic field it experiences
1.

  • a force but no torque
  • a torque but no force
  • force and torque
  • neither a force nor a torque (1)

2. A bar magnet held perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field as in the figure. If the torque acting on it is to be reduced to 1/4th by rotating the magnet towards the direction of the field, find the angle through which the magnet is to be rotated. (2)
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Five Mark Questions and Answers 8
3. State whether the potential energy of the magnet increases or decreases after rotation. Justify your answer. (2)
Answer:
1. force and torque

2. When the bar magnet is perpendicular to the field Torque is maximum
τ = MBsinθ = MBsin(90) = MB
When rotated through an angle θ, torque is
Plus Two Physics Magnetism and Matter Five Mark Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter
Angle through which the magnet is to be rotated is 90 – θ = 75.53°

3. Potential energy decreases. Potential energy is minimum when the magnet is parallel to the field. U = MBcosθ. When rotated to 0° (to make magnet parallel to the field) Potential energy decreases.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Students can Download Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism Questions and Answers, Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism NCERT Text Book Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A Circular coil of wire consisting of 100 turns, each of radius 8.0cm carries a current of 0.40A. What is the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the centre of the coil?
Answer:
Given n = 100, r = 8.0cm = 8 × 10-2
I = 0.4A, B = ?
At the centre of circular coil
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 1
= π × 104T = 3.1 × 10-4T.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
A uniform field equal to 1.5T exists in a cylindrical region of radius 10.0cm, its direction parallel to the axis along east to west. A wire carrying current of 7.0A in the north to south direction passes through this region. What is the magnitude and direction of the force on the wire if

  1. The wire intersects the axis?
  2. The wire is turned from N-S to north-east-north-west direction.
  3. The wire in the N-S direction is lowered from the axis by a distance of 4.0cm?

Answer:
1. F = \(\mathrm{Bl} \ell\) = 1.5 × 7 × \(\frac{20}{100}\) or F = 2.1 N acting vertically downwards.

2. Force will again be 2.1N.

3. F = \(\frac{1.5 \times 7 \times 16}{100}\) = 1.68N.

Question 3.
Two long and parallel straight wires A and B carrying currents of 8.0A and 5.0A in the same direction are separated by a distance of 4.0cm. Estimate the force on a 10cm section of wire A.
Answer:
Given I1 = 8.0A, l2 = 5.0A, r = 4.0cm = 0.04m
l = 10cm = 0.10m
Since
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 2
(direction is given by Fleming left-hand rule).

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A straight wire of length 0.5 metre and carrying a current of 1.2 ampere is placed in uniform magnetic field of induction 2 tesla. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the length of the wire. Find the force on the wire is
Answer:
F = i/B = 1.2 × 0.5 × 2 = 1.2 N

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
To convert a galvanometer into a ammeter, one needs to connect a.
(a) low resistance in parallel
(b) high resistance in parallel
(c) low resistance in series
(d) high resistance in series
Answer:
(a) low resistance in parallel

Question 3.
A coil carrying electric current is placed in uniform magnetic field.
(a) torque is formed
(b) e.m.f is induced
(c) both a and b are correct
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) torque is formed

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 4.
Direction of motion of unit the positive test charge gives direction electric field. Direction of motion of…….gives direction of magnetic field.
Answer:
Unit north pole.

Question 5.
A magnetic system with zero dipole moment
(a) Solenoid
(b) current carrying coil
(c) current loop
(d) toroid
Answer:
(d) Toroid.

Question 6.
Find odd one regarding polarity solenoid, torroid, current carrying loop, bar magnet.
Answer:
Torroid (In this case North and South pole are absent).

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 7.
The nature of path when a charged particle is projected 30° to the direction of magnetic field. (Helix, cycloid, straight line, parabola).
Answer:
Helix

Question 8.
What is solenoid?
Answer:
An insulated copper wire wound in the form of cylinder is called solenoid.

Question 9.
Write mathematical expression for ampere’s theorem.
Answer:
∫B.dl = µ0I

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The figure shows a long straight conductor carrying a current I. A magnetic field is produced around the conductor.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 3
What is the magnitude of the magnetic induction at a point ‘P’ which is at a distant ‘x’ from the conductor?
What is the shape of the magnetic line of force?

Answer:
1. B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{2 \pi x}\). Magnetic field is directed in to the plane of paper.

2. Circular.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
A particle of mass 6.65 × 10-27 kg having positive charge equal to two times of electron, moves with a speed of 6 × 105 m/s in a direction perpendicular to that of a given magnetic field of flux density 0.4 weber/m2. Find the acceleration of the particle.
Answer:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 4
q = 2e, v = 6 × 105 m/s
B = 0.4, m = 6.65 × 10-27 kg
∴ acceleration,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 5
a = 1.15 × 1013 m/s2.

Question 3.
Classify in to true or false.

  1. The magnetic field in the middle of current carrying solenoid depends up on cross sectional area.
  2. The magnetic field depends up on current.
  3. The magnetic field depends up on the material of the core.
  4. The magnetic field depends up on total numbers of turns per unit length.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. True

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 4.
A short straight conductor carries current I

  1. Write the expression for magnetic field due to this conductor.
  2. Represent graphically the variation of magnetic field with distance from the wire.

Answer:
1. dB = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{|d| \sin \theta}{r^{2}}\)

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 6

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The magnetic field along the axis of a circular coil is found to be B = \(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{o}} \mathrm{Ia}^{2}}{2\left(\mathrm{r}^{2}+\mathrm{a}^{2}\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
1. What is the magnetic field along the axis if r>>a
2.

  • Compare the above magnetic field with the electric field along the axis of an electric dipole
  • What is the equation of magnetic dipole moment?

Answer:
1. B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} / a^{2}}{2 r^{3}}\)

2.

  • Electric field due to electric dipole, E = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{P}{r^{3}}\) magnetic field due to magnetic dipole B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{m}{x^{3}}\).
  • Magnetic moment m = IA

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
The circuit diagram for verifying Ohm’s Law is given below, A student unknowingly connects a galvanometer in the place of the ammeter.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 7

  1. What will happen to the galvanometer?
  2. What modification has to be made in the galvanometer if he still wants to use the galvanometer in place of the ammeter?
  3. Assuming voltmeter to be an ideal one, what will happen if the student interchanges the position of the voltmeter and ammeter?

Answer:

  1. Galvanometer will be damaged.
  2. use a shunt resistance.
  3. No current flows, because an ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
Consider a galvanometer with a full scale deflection of 1 m A and resistance 100Ω.

  1. How is the device connected in the circuit?
  2. How can it be converted to an ammeter with full scale deflection 1 ampere?

Answer:
1. Connected in series.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 8
by connecting a shunt resistance. 0.1Ω in parallel with galvanometer, we can convert galvanometer in to ammeter.

Question 4.
Two infinitely long straight parallel wires carry currents I each as shown in fig.

  1. Which law helps to find direction of magnetic field around a current carrying conductor?
  2. What is the magnitude, direction of the magnetic fields at A, and C?

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 9
Answer:
1. Right hand grip rule.

2. The magnitude, direction of the magnetic fields at A, and C:

  • A – outward to the plane of paper
  • C-Inward to the plane of paper.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 5.
Analyze the figure and answer the following questions.

  1. What is the nature of force between these conductors is……….
  2. What is the field due to I1 at second conductor?
  3. What is the force experienced per unit length of IInd conductor?

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 10
Answer:

  1. Attractive
  2. B= \(\frac{\mu_{0} d_{1}}{2 \pi r}\)
  3. f = \(\frac{\mu_{0} l_{1} l_{2}}{2 \pi r}\)

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 6.
“I am very light and present in every matter. When I move along the equator from east to west, I am pushed up. When I am stationary, no force”.

  1. Name the force and write its expression.
  2. Who am I?
  3. What would happen if moved at the poles?

Answer:

  1. Lorentz force in earth’s magnetic field F =qvB
  2. Electron
  3. The earth’s magnetic field at poles is perpendicular to the earth surface. When an electron move, it is pushed to one side, parallel to earth’s surface.

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The internal connections of a moving coil galvanometer is given in the fig (i) and fig (ii)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 11

  1. What is the use of moving coil galvanometer?
  2. Which figure(i) or figure(ii) is used to measure Voltage?
  3. Write an expression for resistance required to convert the moving coil galvanometer in to voltmeter.
  4. If a very small resistance (eg, copper wire) is used to convert moving coil galvanometer in to voltmeter, will it work properly?

Answer:

  1. Moving coil galvanometer is used to detect the presence of current
  2. The instrument shown in figure (2) is used to measure voltage.
  3. Resistance is connected in series with galvanometer. R = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G
  4. No, A high resistance is required to convert galvanometer in to voltmeter.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
When a charged particle enter normal to a uniform magnetic field, it take a circular path.

  1. Name the particle accelerator using this principle.
  2. Explain the working of that particle accelerator with relevant theory.
  3. The neutrons can’t be accelerated using this partide accelerator. Why?

Answer:
1. Cyclotron.

2. Cyclotron:
a. Uses:
It is a device used to accelerate particles to high energy.

b. Principles:
Cyclotron is based on two facts

  • An electric field can accelerate a charged particle.
  • A perpendicular magnetic field gives the ion a circular path.

c. Working:
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 12
At certain instant, let D1 be positive and D2 be negative. Ion (+ve) will be accelerated towards D2 and describes a semicircular path (inside it). When the particle reaches the gap, D1 becomes negative and D2 becomes positive.

So ion is accelerated towards D1 and undergoes a circular motion with larger radius. This process repeats again and again. Thus ion comes near the edge of the dee with high K.E. This ion can be directed towards the target by a deflecting plate.

3. Charge of neutron is zero. Only charged particle can be accelerated using particle accelerated.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
A current flows through a circular loop of radius r is shown in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 13
1. What is the direction of magnetic field at ‘o’? (1)

2. Derive an equation for magnetic field at ‘o’ due to the circular loop carrying current i? (2)

3. If the loop splits into two equal halves as shown in figure. (1)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 14
What will be the magnetic field at the center ‘o’?
Answer:
1. B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{2 r}\) in t0 the plane of paper

2. Magnetic field on the axis of a circular current loop:
Consider a circular loop of radius ‘a’ and carrying current T. Let P be a point on the axis of the coil, at distance x from A and r from ‘O’. Consider a small length dl at A.
The magnetic field at ‘p’ due to this small element dl,
dB =\(\frac{\mu_{0} \mathrm{Idl} \sin 90}{4 \pi \mathrm{x}^{2}}\)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 15
[since sin 90° -1]
The dB can be resolved into dB cosΦ (along Py) and dB sinΦ (along Px). Similarly consider a small element at B, which produces a magnetic field ‘dB’ at P. If we resolve this magnetic field we get.
dB sinΦ (along px) and dB cosΦ (along py1)
dB cosΦ components cancel each other, because they are in opposite direction. So only dB sinΦ components are found at P, so total filed at P is
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 16
from ∆AOP we get x = (r2 + a2 )1/2
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 17
Let there be N turns in the loop then,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 18
Point at the centre of the loop:
When the point is at the centre of the loop, (r = 0) Then,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 19
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 20

3. Zero

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 4.
A boy connects a galvanometer directly to a cell of emf 1.5v to measure a current through a load 1Ω.

  1. Which instrument can be used to measure the current in such a circuit?
  2. What changes should be made in the galvanometer to measure such a high current? Explain using a circuit diagram.
  3. The boy connected the galvanometer into a high current measuring device and he connected the device parallel to the load. What will be the observation. Justify.

Answer:
1. Ammeter

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 21
A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by a low resistance (shunt) connected parallel to it.
Theory:
Let G be the resistance of the galvanometer, giving full deflection fora current Ig. To convert it into an ammeter, a suitable shunt resistance ‘S’ is connected in parallel. In this arrangement, Ig current flows through Galvanometer and remaining (I-Ig) current flows through shunt resistance.
Since G and S are parallel
P.d Across G = p.d across S
Ig × G =(I-Ig)S
S = \(\frac{\lg \mathrm{G}}{\left(1-\mathrm{l}_{\mathrm{g}}\right)}\)
Connecting this shunt resistance across galvanometer we can convert a galvanometer into ammeter.

3. Ammeter is a low resistance device. Hence it draws high current. This high current will damage it.

Question 5.
An electric charge will experience a force in uniform electric field. Similarly a moving charge experience a magnetic force (Lorentz) in magnetic field. The SI unit of magnetic field intensity is defined in terms of Lorentz Force.

  1. Write the expression for magnetic Lorentz force.
  2. Mention any two difference between electric field arid magnetic field.
  3. Give an account of work done by Magnetic Lorentz force on moving charge and corresponding change in K.E.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 22

2. Electric field is due to a charge, either in motion or at rest. Magnetic field is due to the motion of charge. Direction of electric force is colinear to electric field. Direction of magnetic force is perpendicularto magnetic field.

3. If velocity (displacement) is perpendicular to Lorentz force the work done will be zero and hence there will no change in K.E.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 6.
“Moving coil Galvanorrieter is a device used for detecting very feeble current”.

  1. What is the working principle of a moving coil galvanometer?
  2. Describe the construction and working of a moving coil galvanometer.
  3. When a high current is passed through a moving coil galvanometer, it will get destroyed. How?

Answer:
1. Principle:
A conductor carrying current when placed in a magnetic field experiences a force, (given by Fleming’s left hand rule), τ = NIAB.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 23
A moving coil galvanometer consists of rectangular coil of wire having area ‘A’ and number of turns ‘n’ which is wound on metallic frame and is placed between two magnets. The magnets are concave in shape, which produces radial field.
Working :
Let T be the current flowing the coil, Then the torque acting on the coil. τ = NIAB, Where A is the area of coil and B is the magnetic field.

This torque produces a rotation on coil, thus fiber is twisted and angle (Φ). Due to this twisting a restoring torque (τ = KΦ) is produced in spring. Under equilibrium, we can write
Torque on the coil = restoring torque on the spring
NIAB = KΦ
Φ \(=\left(\frac{\mathrm{BAN}}{\mathrm{K}}\right)\) I
The quantity inside the bracket is constant for a galvanometer.
Φ ∝ I
The above equation shows that the deflection depends on current passing through galvanometer.

3. High current will produce large amount of heat. This heat will destroy coils in the galvanometer.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 7.
When a current carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic field it experiences a force.
1. Arrive at the expression forthe force experienced by the conductor. (2)
2. A conductor carrying current I direct out of the plane of the paper is lying in the magnetic field as in Fig. Draw the direction of force experienced by the conductor. (1)
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 24
3. If the conductor is lying parallel to the field what will be the force? (2)
Answer:
1. Consider a rod of uniform cross section ‘A’ and length ‘l’ Let ‘n’ be the number of electrons per unit volume (number density). ‘vd’ be the drift velocityof electrons for steady current ‘I’.
Total number of electrons in the entire volume of rod =nAl
Charge of total electrons = nA l .e
‘e’ is the charge of a single electron.
The Lorentz force on electrons,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 25

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 26

3. Zero
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 27

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 8.
A long straight conductor carrying current is placed near a current carrying circular loop as in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 28
1. If B1 is the field of the ring and B2 the field due to straight conductor what will be the direction of B1 and B2 at O. (1)

2. The current through the loop and the conductor are 2A and the conductor is at as distance 20cm from the centre of loop. What should be the diameter of the loop so that the net field at O is zero. (3)
Answer:
1. B1 into the plane and B2 out of the plane.

2. B1 is the field of the ring and B2 the field of due to straight conductor.
B = B1 – B2 = 0
B1 = B2
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 29
2a = 40π × 10-2m = 1,256m
Diameter d = 1.256 m.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 9.
A charged particle is travelling in the figure.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 30

  1. Name the force experienced by the charge in the region II. (1)
  2. Give the expression for the net force experienced by the charge in the region II. (1)
  3. If the charge reaches the region III without any change in its initial direction of motion find the velocity of the charged particle in terms of E and B. (2)

Answer:
1. Lorentz Force

2. F = q (E + v × B)

3. Electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the velocity of the particle. If the total force on the charge is zero and the charge will move in the fields undeflected. This happens when
qE = qvB or v = \(\frac{E}{B}\).

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 10.
The medical diagnostic technique called magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) requires that patient lie in a strong magnetic field. It consists of two large solenoids, placed above and below.

  1. What is solenoid?
  2. Which law help you to find magnetic field due to solenoid? State the law.
  3. Obtain an expression for magnetic field due to solenoid using the above law.
  4. If the diameter of one of the MRI coil is increased without changing the current, does the magnetic field that it produce at its centre increases, decreases or stay the same? Justify.

Answer:
1. An insulated conducting wire wound in the form of cylinder is called solenoid.

2. Ampere’s circuital law:
Ampere’s circuital theorem states that the line integral of the magnetic field around any closed path in free space is equal to µ0 times the net current passing through the surface.

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 31
Consider a solenoid having radius Y. Let ‘n’ be the number of turns per unit length and I be the current flowing through it.

In order to find the magnetic field (inside the solenoid ) consider an Amperian loop PQRS. Let ‘l‘ be the length and ‘b’ the breadth

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Applying Amperes law, we can write
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 32
Substituting the above values in eq (1), we get
Bl = µ0 lenc (2)
But lenc = n l I
where ’nl ’ is the total number of turns that carries current I (inside the loop PQRS)
∴ eq (2) can be written as
Bl = µ0nIl
B = µ0 nI
If core of solenoid is filled with a medium of relative permittivity µr, then
B = µ0µrnl

4. No change. Magnetic field is independent of radius.

Plus Two Physics Moving Charges and Magnetism Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
You are supplied with a galvanometer, resistor, and some connecting wires.

  1. Using a circuit diagram, show how will you convert the given galvanometer into an ammeter.
  2. Find the expression for the shunt resistance in the circuit.
  3. A galvanometer is to be converted into an ammeter of range 0 – 1 A. Galvanometer has resistance 100Ω and the current for full scale deflection is 10mA. Find the length of the nichrome wire to be used as shunt.

Given, Resistivity ρ= 1.1 x 10-6Ωm
Diameter of the wire = 1mm
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 33

2. Let Ig be the current through the galvanometer of resistance RG and the shunt resistance be rs.
Let I be the current to be measured by the converted ammeter.
We can write,
IgRG = (I – Ig)rs
∴ rs = \(\frac{I_{g} R_{G}}{\left(1-I_{g}\right)}\)

3. Given I = 1A
Ig = 10mA
RG = 100Ω
Diameter = 1mm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 34

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 2.
Consider a conductor carrying current ‘I’, P is a point at a distance away from the conductor.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 35

  1. What is the direction of magnetic field at P? (1)
  2. What are the factors affecting magnetic field at P due the element dl carrying current i? (1)
  3. Derive an expression for magnetic field at P, if the current carrying conductor has infinite length? (2)
  4. Draw a graph connecting Intensity of magnetic
    field and distance. (1)

Answer:
1. In to the plane of paper

2. dB = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{|d| \sin \theta}{r^{2}}\)

  • Current I
  • Length of element dl
  • sin of angle between element and line joining mid point of element and point.
  • Inversely proportional to square of the distance between element and point.

3. Long straight conductor:
Consider a long straight conductor carrying ‘I’ ampere current. To find magnetic field at ‘P’, we construct a circle of radius r (passing through P).
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 36
According to Ampere’s circuital law we can write
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 37

4.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 38

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 3.
A student placed a rectangular loop carrying current in between the pole pieces of two magnetics and found that the loop is rotating.

  1. What is the net force on the loop?
  2. Write the expression for the torque experienced by the loop in vector form.
  3. At what position will the coil be in stable equilibrium?
  4. A wire of length 4m is bent in the form of a circular coil of single turn. A current 1A is flowing through the wire. If the coil is placed in a magnetic field of 0.4T find the maximum torque experienced by the coil.

Answer:
1. Zero

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 39

3. θ = 0, τ = 0, Potential energy is minimum (Area vector of the coil is parallel to the direction of magnetic field.)

4. I = 4m
2πr = 4
r = \(\frac{4}{2 \pi}\)
Area = A = πr2
Maximum torque = NIAB = 1 × 1 × π × \(\left(\frac{4}{2 \pi}\right)^{2}\) × 0.4
= 0.509 Nm

Question 4.
Ampere’s theorem helps to find the magnetic field in a region around a current carrying conductor.

  1. Draw the variation of intensity of magnetic field with the distance from the axis of a current carrying conductor.
  2. A conductor carrying a current I is bent as shown in the figure. Apply Ampere’s theorem at the regions 1 and 2 shown in the figure.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 40
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 41

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 42

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 5.
The force acting on a moving charge in a magnetic field is called magnetic Lorents force.

  1. Write the equation of force experienced by a charged particle moving in a magnetic field.
  2. Using the equation derive an expression for the force acting on a current carrying conductor of length T in a magnetic field B.
  3. “A charge can move in a helical path in a magnetic field”. Do you agree with it? Explain.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 43

2. Consider a rod of uniform cross section ‘A’ and length ‘ l ’. Let ’n’ be the number of electrons per unit volume (number density). ‘vd’ be the drift velocity of electrons for steady current ‘I’.
Total number of electrons in the entire volume of rod = nA l
Charge of total electrons = nA l .e
‘e’ is the charge of a single electron.
The Lorentz force on electrons,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 44

3. Yes, When an electron moves in a magnetic field with an angle θ, the electron undergoes for helical motion. The velocity of electron has two components, usinθ and ucosθ.

The component usinθ produces circular motion and ‘ucosθ’ produces translational motion. The combined effect of circular motion and translation motion will be helical motion.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 6.
A long wire is bent into a circular coil of one turn having radius ‘R’ and a current T is passed through it

  1. Name the law to find the direction of magnetic field due to this current loop
  2. Find an expression for magnetic field produced by this current loop at its centre
  3. If the same wire is bent to a smaller radius Y having ‘n’ turns and send same current through it. Find the ratio of magnetic field at the centre in two cases.

Answer:
1. Right hand screw rule.

2. The magnetic field at a distance × from centre of loop is given by
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 45

3.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 46
If wire is bend into smaller radius of n turns.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 47
B2 = n2 B1

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 7.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 48
A gas chamber is filled with hydrogen and a magnetic field is applied to it, then exposed to γ-ray. The γ-ray hits the hydrogen atom and produces high energy electron, low energy electron and positron (electron having + ve charge). The above photograph represents the trajectory of the particles. [Here magnetic field is applied Out of the plane of photo graph]

  1. Which force drives the particle in a circular path and write the mathematical from.
  2. Obtain a general expression for radius of the circular path.
  3. Analyse the figure and match the columns given below.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 49
Answer:
1. Magnetic Lorentz force

2. The centripetal force required for rotation is given magnetic Lorentz force Hence we can write
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 50

3. Analyse the figure and match the columns given below:

  • Low energy electrons – B
  • High energy electron – C
  • Positron – A

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 8.
A proton, an electron, a neutron, and an alpha particle are entering a region of uniform magnetic field with same velocities. The tracks of these particles are labelled.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 51

  1. Identify the tracks of each particle. (1)
  2. Write the expression for the force experienced by a charged particle in the magnetic field in vector form. (1)
  3. If the proton is moving at 90° to the uniform magnetic field what will be the change in kinetic energy of the proton? Give reason. (1)
  4. An electron with energy 1 keV is entering a uniform magnetic field of 0.04T at an angle 60° with the field. Predict the path of the electron and find the characteristics of the path. (2)

Answer:
1. Identify the tracks of each particle:

  • Path 1 – proton
  • Path 2 – alpha particle
  • Path 3 – neutron
  • Path 4 – electron

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 52

3. Zero. Since the force is perpendicular to the direction of velocity work done is zero.

4. KE = 1 keV = 1 × 103 × 1.6 × 10-19 = 1.6 × 10-16
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 53
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 54
= 8.39 × 10-3.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 9.
A current carrying conductor is bent in the form of a circular ring and is placed in the plane of the paper.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 55

  1. What is the direction of the magnetic field at the centre of the ring? (1)
  2. Arrive at the expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of the ring. (3)
  3. Another identical ring carrying the same current is brought with its axis perpendicular to the axis of the first as in figure. Find the magneticfield at the common centre. Calculate the angle between the net magnetic field and the axis of any one of the coils. (1)

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 56
Answer:
1. Out of the plane of the ring.

2.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 57
Consider a circular loop of radius ‘a’ and carrying current ‘I’. Let P be a point on the axis of the coil, at distance x from A and r from ‘O’. Consider a small length dl at A. The magnetic field at ‘p’ due to this small element dl,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 58
[since sin 90° -1]
The dB can be resolved into dB cosΦ (along Py) and dB sinΦ (along Px). Similarly consider a small element at B, which produces a magnetic field ‘dB’ at P.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

If we resolve this magnetic field we get. dB sinΦ (along px) and dB cosΦ (along py1) dB cosΦ components cancel each other, because they are in opposite direction. So only dB sinΦ components are found at P, so total filed at P is
B = ∫dBsinΦ
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 59
but from ∆AOP we get, sinΦ = a/x
∴ We get,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 60
Let there be N turns in the loop then,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 61
At the center of the loop,
r= 0
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 62

3. Magnetic fields are as shown in the fig.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 63
The diagonal gives the resultant field.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 64

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 10.
An electron revolving round the nucleus acts as a magnetic dipole.

  1. Which force provides the centripetal force for electron? (1)
  2. Write the expression for the magnetic dipole moment of electron in vector form. What is the angle between direction of the magnetic moment and direction of angular momentum? (2)
  3. A charge 2mC is moving through a circular path of radius 0.15m with frequency 1000Hz. Find the magnetic moment associated with the charge path. (2)

Answer:
1. Electrostatic force between electron and the nucleus.

2. Vectorially
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 65
The magnetic moment of the electron is opposite in direction to the angular momentum.
∴ Angle = 180°.

3. Revolving charge behaves as a current loop. Hence Magnetic field is given as
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 66
I = \(\frac{q}{T}\) = qv = 2 × 10-3 × 100 = 0.2A
Magnetic moment = IA = 0.2 × π × 0.152
= 0.0141 Am.

Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

Question 11.
You are supplied with a galvanometer, resistor, and some connecting wires.

  1. Using a circuit diagram, show how will you convert the given galvanometer into an ammeter. (1)
  2. Find the expression for the shunt resistance in the circuit. (2)
  3. A galvanometer is to be converted into an ammeter of range 0 -1 A. Galvanometer has resistance 100Ω and the current for full-scale deflection is 10mA. Find the length of the nichrome wire to be used as shunt. (3)

Given, Resistivity ρ = 1.1 × 10-6Ωm
Diameter of the wire = 1 mm
Answer:
1.
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 67

2. Let Ig be the current through the galvanometer of resistance RG and the shunt resistance be rs. Let I be the current to be measured by the converted ammeter.
We can write,
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 68

3. Given I = IA
Ig = 10mA
RG = 100Ω
Diameter = 1mm
Plus Two Physics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism - 69

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour

Students can Download Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour Questions and Answers, Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suppose a consumer’s preferences are monotonic. Which bundle of goods the consumer will select over the bundle (15,15), (10,12) and (12,12).
Answer:
Consumer prefers the bundle (15,15) over the other bundles.

Question 2.
In drawing an individual demand curve, all but one of the following are kept constant.
(a) Price of the commodity
(b) Price of other commodities
(c) Income of the consumer
(d) Taste and preference of the consumer
Answer:
(b) Price of other commodities

Question 3.
Find out economic terms.

  1. Bundles that are on or below the budget line.
  2. Consumer prefers the bundle which has more of the goods compared to the other bundle.
  3. A group of indifference curves.

Answer:

  1. Budget set
  2. Monotonic preferences
  3. Indifference map

HSSLive.Guru

Question 4.
Slope of indifference curve shows.
(a) Price ratio (rule)
(b) DMRS
(c) DMU
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) DMRS

Question 5.
In the case of inferior goods, the relationship between income and quantity demanded in.
(a) negative
(b) positive
(c) constant
(d) cannot be predicted
Answer:
(a) negative

Question 6.
Elasticity in a rectangulas hyperbola is:
(a) 0
(b) a
(c) 1
(d) 0.5
Answer:
(c) 1

Question 7.
Rise in demand due to fall in price is called:
(a) Increase in demand
(b) Expansion of demand
(c) Contraction of demand
(d) Decrease in demand
Answer:
(b) Expansion of demand

HSSLive.Guru

Question 8.
If demand falls from 100 to 75 units due to rise in price from 10 to 15, the value of elasticity is…
(a) 1
(b) 0.5
(c) 0
(d) 2
Answer:
(b) 0.5

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suppose Raju is indifferent to bundles (8,7) and (7,7). Are the preferences of Raju are monotonic?
Answer:
No, if his preferences are monotonic, he will prefer the bundle (8,7) over (7,7).

Question 2.
Consider a market where there are 3 consumers and suppose their demands for the good are given as follows:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img1
Calculate the market demand for the good.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img2

Question 3.
Complete the following table.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img3
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img4

Question 4.
Pick out the odd one and justify your answer. Bread and butter, Pen and Ink, Butter and Jam, Tennis ball and Tennis racket.
Answer:
Butter and Jam. Others are complementary goods.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 5.
State the law of demand. Test the applicability of the law in the status symbol goods.
Answer:
Law of demand – “other things remaining the same as the price of a commodity falls, its quantity demanded increases and vice versa”.

Certain ostentatious goods like luxury cars; diamonds, etc. are exceptions to the law of demand. These goods are considered as status symbol goods consumed by the rich. The status goes up as price increases. Therefore, the demand for these goods increases as their price increases.

Question 6.
The demand function of a commodity is Q = 30 – 2 P. If it is a free good, quantity demanded would be.
Answer:
If the commodity is a free good, the price = 0
Q = 30 – 2 × 0
= 30 – 0 = 30

Question 7.
When the elasticity of demand for a product is unitary,

  1. Name the shape of the demand curve?
  2. Give the value of price elasticity of demand?

Answer:

  1. Rectangular hyperbola
  2. Value of price elasticity of demand is unity

Question 8.
Consider the demand curve D(p) = 10 – 3p. What is the elasticity at price 2?
Answer:
D(P) = 10 – 3p
Since P = 2, we get
D(P) = 10 – 3 × 2
= 10 – 6 = 4
Σd = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta P}=\frac{4}{2}\) = 2
Thus there is elastic demand.

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suppose a consumer buys bundles of good 1 and good 2. His income is given as ‘M’ and it is fully spent. If the prices of good 1 and good 2 are P1 and P2 respectively, state the consumer’s budget constraint.
Answer:
We assume that the consumer buys bundles of good 1 and good 2. The consumer’s consumption expenditure is limited by his income. Given the prices of good 1 and good 2 as P1 and P2 respectively and his income as ‘M’, consumer’s budget constraint can be represented as P1X1 + P2X2 ≤ M

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
Match the following
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img5
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img6

Question 3.
Given below an indifference curve.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img7

  1. State the meaning of an indifference curve.
  2. Identify the points A, B, C and D on the 1C.

Answer:
1. An indifference curve shows different bundles that give the consumer the same level of satisfaction. In other words, an indifference curve joins all points representing bundles which are considered indifferent by the consumer.

2. Points A and B are on the indifference curve indicating the same level of satisfaction. Point C lies above the indifference curve representing the preferred bundles. Point D lies below the indifference curve showing the inferior bundles.

Question 4.
Two demand function equations are given below.
QD1 = 60 – 10P
QD2 = 80 -10P
a. Derive two demand schedules forthe above de-mand functions (Take the values of P as 1,2,3,4,5)
QD1= 60- 10P
QD2 = 80 – 10P
P = 1,2,3,4,5
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img8

Question 5.
Fora linear demand curve,
d (p) = a – bp; 0 < p < a/b = 0; p> a/b

  1. State the meaning of ‘a’ and -b?
  2. What does the slope of the demand curve mean?

Answer:

  1. In the equation of linear demand curve, ‘a’ is the vertical intercept and-b is the slope of the demand curve.
  2. The slope of the demand curve measures the rate at which demand changes with respect to its price.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
Observe the three budget lines drawn below.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img9
If AB is The Intial Budget Line, What Causes The Shift in budget line.

  1. from ABtoAB
  2. from ABtoA

Answer:

  1. Fall in price of good 1
  2. A rise in income or fall in prices of both good 1 & good 2.

Question 7.
Choose the correct answer from the given multiple choices.
1. Which of the following goods has more elastic demand?

  • Rice
  • Computer
  • Electricity
  • Life-saving drugs
  • Salt

2. Identify the nature of demand curve when elasticity of demand is equal to one.

  • Perfectly elastic demand
  • Rectangular hyperbola
  • Parallel to Vertical axis.
  • Perfectly inelastic demand
  • Parallel to horizontal axis

Answer:

  1. computer
  2. rectangular hyperbola

Question 8.
Compare the slope of the budget line and slope of the indifference curve.
Answer:
The slope of the indifference curve shows the rate at which the consumer is willing to substitute with others. Here the substitution is in terms of satisfaction. The slope of the budget line shows the rate at which a consumer is able to substitute our good for others. Here the substitution is in terms of price.

HSSLive.Guru

Question 9.
Indicate for each of the following situations whether it would shift the demand curve upward or downward

  1. The price of substitute falls.
  2. Consumer’s income increases
  3. There is sudden rise in population.
  4. Complementary goods become more expensive.
  5. There is possibility of further fall in price, nilei
  6. New cheaper substitutes of the commodity appear in the market.

Answer:

  1. downward
  2. upward
  3. upward
  4. downward
  5. downward
  6. downward

Question 10.
Classify the following goods into two based on their elasticity.
Petrol, medicine, tomatoes, car, garments, salt
Answer:

Elastic DemandInelastic Demand
TomatoesPetrol
GarmentsMedicine
CarSalt

Question 11.
Imagine that you are the finance minister of Kerala. You want to raise more tax revenue. How will you use elasticity in your tax proposals?
Answer:
As finance minister, I will raise taxes on goods like cigarettes, liquor, and luxury products. These goods have inelastic demand and therefore, their demand will not decline in proportion to the price rise. This will help to raise more tax revenue.

Question 12.
Categorize the following into substitutes and complementaries.
Coffee and tea, pen and ink, bread and jam, scooter and petrol, shoes and chappels, airplane and train.
Answer:
1. Substitutes:

  • Coffee and tea
  • Shoes and chapels
  • Airplane and train

2. Complementaries:

  • pen and ink
  • bread and jam
  • scooter and petrol

HSSLive.Guru

Question 13.
The price of X falls from ₹8 per unit to t 6. Consequently, the quantity demanded increased from 80 to 100. Calculate the price elasticity of demand.
Answer:
\(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta P} \times \frac{P}{2}\)
ΔQ = 20
ΔP = 2
P = 8
Q = 80
ep = \(\frac{20}{2} \times \frac{8}{80}=\frac{160}{160}=1\)
ep = 1
This is unitary elastic demand

Question 14.
State whether true or falls

  1. The demand curve is generally sloping upward
  2. Demand for cosmetic is elastic
  3. Utility is want satisfying power of a commodity

Answer:

  1. False. Demand curve slops downward.
  2. True
  3. True

Question 15.
What do you mean by inferior goods? Give some example?
Answer:
Inferior goods are those goods whose demand decreases with rise in the income and demand increases with the fall in the income.

Question 16.
Give an account of price elasticity of demand.
Answer:
Price elasticity of demand is a measure used in economics to show the responsiveness, or elasticity, of the quantity, demanded of a good or service to a change in its price. It was devised by Alfred Marshall. The formula for the
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img11
The above formula usually yields a negative value, due to the inverse nature of the relationship between price and quantity demanded, as described by the “law of demand”.

This measure of elasticity is sometimes referred to as the own-price elasticity of demand for a good, i.e., the elasticity of demand with respect to the good’s own price, in order to distinguish it from the elasticity of demand for that good with respect to the change in the price of some other good, i.e., a complementary or substitute good. The latter type of elasticity measure is called a cross-price elasticity of demand.

Question 17.
Given the level of income and market prices, the rational consumer wants to attain the maximum level of satisfaction. Using the budget line and indifference curve that you have studied, answer the following questions.

  1. Construct a diagram showing the consumer’s equilibrium.
  2. What condition is satisfied at this equilibrium point?

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img12
2. Price ratio = Marginal Rate of Substitution

HSSLive.Guru

Question 18.
Two diagrams related to demand are given below. What do they represent?
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img13
Answer:

  • Figure 1 – Movement along the demand curve due to change in price.
  • Figure 2 – Shift in demand due to change in non price factor.

Question 19.
If other things remaining same, graphically explain what happens to the demand curve for chicken if there is

  1. An increase in the price of fish.
  2. A decrease in family income.
  3. An increase in the price of chicken.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img14
2.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img15

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
“Price elasticity of demand is different at different points on the linear demand curve” Prove this point diagrammatically.
Answer:
On the linear demand curve, Price elasticity of demand varies from point to point. It can be seen from the linear demand given below. As we move from the higher point to lower point the value of elasticity goes on decreasing.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img16

Question 2.
Locate the optimum bundle of the consumer in a diagram. Also, suggest the conditions for the consumer’s optimum.
Answer:
The optimum bundle of the consumer is located at the point where the budget line is tangent to one of the indifference curves. It is drawn below.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img17

  1. Condition I: Budget line should be tangent to the indifference Curve
  2. Condition II: Slope of 1C (MRSxy) should be equal to slope of budget line (Price Ratio)

HSSLive.Guru

Question 3.
Draw a demand curve at all points of which price elasticity remains the same. Also, name the demand curve and give the equation for it.
Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img18
The demand curve at which all points represent same elasticity is called a rectangular hyperbola. The equation is xy = c, where, x and y are two variables and c is a constant. With such a demand curve, no matter at what point, the consumer consumes at a constant rate.

Question 4.
Gopan buys 8 kg of rice at price ₹15 per kg. It is found that the price elasticity of demand is 2. At what price he will buy 13 kg of rice?
Answer:
Price elasticity of demand means the degree of responsiveness of demand due to change in price. The formula for price elasticity of a product is,
Ep = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta P} \times \frac{P}{Q}\)
Here the price elasticity of demand = 2
\(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta P} \times \frac{P}{Q}\) = 2
\(\Delta P=\frac{8.12}{2}\)
ΔP = 4.06
new price is 13 – 4.06 = 8.96

Question 5.
Show how the following changes affect the budget line
Answer:

  1.  Increase in income of the consumer
  2. Decrease in income
  3. Fall in the price of good 1
  4. Rise in the price of good 1

Answer:
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img19
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img19.

Question 6.
Suppose there are 2 consumers in the market for a good and their demand function are as follows Find out market demand function.
Answer:
First individuals demand function Second individual’s demand function = d2 (P) = 30 – 2p
∴ Market demand function = d1 (P) = d2 (P)
= 20 – p + 30 – 2p
= 50-3p

HSSLive.Guru

Question 7.
Derive the slope of budget line, using symbols?
Answer:
The slope of the budget line measures the amount of change in good 2 required per unit of change in good 1 along the budget line. Consider any two points (X1, x2) and (x1 + ΔX1,x2 + Δx2) on the budget line.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img20

Question 8.
When price of orange is ₹4, consumer buys 50 units of it. The price elasticity is -2. How many units will the consumer buy at ₹3 per unit of orange?
Answer:
Σ d = -2
When P = 4, q = 50
When P = 3, q = ?
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img21
100 = 4 Δ q
Δ q = 100/4 =25
∴ New quantity = q + Δ q
= 50 + 25 = 75

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The consumer has an income of Rs. 100. He wants to consume two goods X and Y. Prices of X and Y are Rs. 20 and 10 respectively.

  1. State the equation of the budget line.
  2. How much of good X he can buy if he spends entire income on good X.
  3. How much of good Y he can buy if he spends entire income on good Y.

Answer:
1. The equation of the budget line is given as P1 + P2X2=M
Where P1 and P2 are prices of good 1 and good 2 respectively. X1 and X2 are quantities of two goods. ‘M’ denotes the income of the consumer.

2. 5 units of good X.

3. 10 units of good Y

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
A consumer wants to consume two goods. The prices of the two goods are ₹4 and ₹5 respectively. The consumer’s income is ₹20.

  1. Write down the equation of the budget line
  2. How much of good 1 can the consumer consume if he spends his entire income on the good?
  3. How much of good 2 can the consumer consume if he spends his entire income on the good?
  4. What is the slope of the budget line?

Answer:
1. the equation of the budget line is p1x1+ p2x2= M
where P1 and P2 are prices of good1 and good 2. x-s and x2 are quantities of goods and M is his money income,

2. X1 = M/ P1
= 20/4 = 5 units
X2 = M/ P2
= 20/5 = 4 units

3. slope of the budget line is
= -P1/P2
= -4/5
= – 0.8 units

Question 3.
One important factor influencing demand is price of the product.

  1. Can you make a list of four other factors that influence the demand for a good?
  2. Also, establish the relationship between the factor identified and the demand for the product.
Factor influencing DemandRelationship between demand and the factor
Price of the productInversely related

Answer:

  • Column 1. Income, price of substitutes, advertisement, tastes & preferences
  • Column 2. Positive, Negative, Positive, Positive

Question 4.
A few goods are given below. State whether the demand for the product is elastic or inelastic. Justify your answer.
Rice, salt, car, life-saving drugs, computer, electricity
Answer:

  1. Rice – Inelastic – Essential good Car – Elastic – Luxury good.
  2. Salt – Inelastic- Insignificant share in total expenditure. Life saving drugs – Inelastic – Not possible to postpone purchase.
  3. Computer- Elastic demand,Non-essential good. Electricity – Inelastic – No substitutes

Question 5.
As you know elasticity of demand is influenced by several factors. Observing the nature of good given in the first column, complete the following table. Write whether the demand for the product is elastic or in¬elastic and also the reason.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img23
Answer:
Column 2 – Column 3
Elastic – luxury product
Elastic – close substitutes are available
Elastic – no substitute
Elastic – Essential good
Elastic – Essential good

HSSLive.Guru

Question 6.
The diagram below shows the demand curves of commodities and b which are complementary to each other.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img24

  1. What are complementary goods?
  2. Write two examples each for commodity
  3. The diagram shows the changes in the demand curve of commodity ‘b’ due to a fall in the price of commodity ‘a’.

Answer:

  1. Complementary goods are those goods demanded jointly for the consumption of one good, it requires other good too.
  2. Car, petrol, mobile phone, sim card, etc.
  3. When the price of ‘a1 comes down more of ‘a’ will be demanded. This would result in an increase in the demand for its complementary ‘b’.

Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img25

Plus Two Economics Theory of Consumer Behaviour Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a seminar paper on the measurement of price elasticity of demand.
Answer:
Methods of measuring elasticity
Elasticity can be measured by using methods such as percentage method, linear method/point method, and expenditure method.
The detailed descriptions of the methods are as follows:
1. Percentage method:
Percentage method is also known as the proportionate method. As per percentage method estimate the elasticity of demand by dividing the percentage change in quantity demanded by the percentage change in price as given earlier. Thus, the formula for estimating elasticity of demand through percentage method is given as The procedure of computing elasticity using percentage method is provided in the example: 1.

2. Linear method/point method:
It is popularly known as the mathematical method of measuring price elasticity of demand. It is also known as point method of measuring elasticity of demand. The elasticity would be different on different points in a straight-line demand curve.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img26
The following points can be observed from the above figure:
a. When a straight-line demand curve cut the X-axis, the elasticity of demand would be zero (eD = 0) (perfect inelastic demand).

b. The elasticity of demand at the midpoint on a straight-line demand curve would be one (eD = 1) (unitary elastic demand).

c. When a straight-line demand curve cut the Y-axis, the elasticity of demand would be zero (eD = a) (perfect elastic demand).

d. Between the midpoint and the point where the demand curve cuts the X-axis on a straight line would be less than one (inelastic demand) (eD = <1).

e. Between the midpoint and the point where the demand curve cuts the Y-axis on a straight line would be more than one (elastic demand) (eD>1).

3. Expenditure method:
The total expenditure on a commodity can be find out by multiplying the quantity of commodity with its price. As per expenditure method, the price elasticity is measured by comparing the change in price and the change in total expenditure. Three possibilities may occur in this context.

a. If the total expenditure does not change even if there is a price change, then elasticity would be 1 or unity (eD = 1)

b. If the total expenditure decreases as a result of increase in price or total expenditure increases as a result of fall in price, it would be more elastic (eD> 1).

c. If the total expenditure increases as a result of decrease in price or total expenditure decreases as a result of rise in price, it would be less elastic (eD = <1).

HSSLive.Guru

Question 2.
The demand curve for apple is given below. Show the effect on the demand curve for apple due to the following factors.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img27

  1. A newspaper report stating the health benefit of apple
  2. The price of apple increases.
  3. What is price elasticity of demand? What do you think about the price elasticity of apple. Justify your answer.

Answer:
1. The demand curve for apple shifts rightward. Taste and preference arise in favour of apple.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img28
2. There is a movement along the demand curve. This is due to an increase in price. Quantity demand of apple falls.
Plus Two Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Theory of Consumer Behaviour img29
3. It is the responsiveness of quantity demanded to a change in price.
\(\mathrm{Ped}=\frac{\% \mathrm{Δad}}{\% \mathrm{ΔP}}\)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Students can Download Chapter 13 Amines Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Plus Two Chemistry Amines One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The reaction of aniline with benzoyl chloride gives
(a) benzoin
(b) benzanilide
(c) benzalaniline
(d) benzamide
Answer:
(b) benzanilide

Question 2.
Nitromethane on reaction with H2/Pd gives ____________
Answer:
Ethanamine (CH3CH2NH2)

Question 3.
Say TRUE or FALSE
Only aliphatic primary amines give a foul smelling compound with CHCl3 and alcoholic potash.
Answer:
False

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 4.
When benzene diazonium salt solution is treated with KI ___________ is formed.
Answer:
lodo benzene (C6H5I)

Question 5.
Identify ‘Z’ in the sequence:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines one mark q5 img 1
(a) Nitrobenzene
(b) Benzene
(c) Fluorobenzene
(d) Phenol
Answer:
(a) Nitrobenzene

Question 6.
Amine that cannot be prepared by Gabriel Phthalimide Synthesis is _________
Answer:
Aniline

Question 7.
Phenyl isocyanide, is prepared from aniline by ________
Answer:
Carbylamine reaction

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 8.
Secondary amines can be prepared by ___________
Answer:
Reduction of nitro compounds

Question 9.
By which process aniline can be purified ___________
Answer:
Steam distillation

Question 10.
A primary amine that can be obtained both by the reduction of cyanides and amides is ___________
(a) methyl amine
(b) benzylamine
(c) aniline
(d) isopropylamine
Answer:
(b) benzylamine

Question 11.
The amine which will not liberate nitrogen on reaction with nitrous acid is __________
Answer:
t-butyl amine

Plus Two Chemistry Amines Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Ammonia is less basic than aniline.

  1. What is the reason for low basic character of aniline compared to ammonia?
  2. Draw the resonating structures of aniline.

Answer:
1. In aromatic amines the lone pair on nitrogen is in conjugation with benzene ring due to resonance effect and thus making it less available for protonation. Hence basic character is less than that of ammonia.
2.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q1 img 2

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 2.
Two compounds are functional isomers of each other. On reduction one gives primary amine and the other gives secondary amine.

  1. Identify the class of compounds.
  2. Explain the reduction reaction.

Answer:

  1. Cyanides and Isocyanides.
  2. When cyanides are reduced using LiAlH4 primary amines are obtained. Whereas when isocyanides are reduced using LiAlH4 secondary amines are obtained.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q2 img 3

Question 3.
When alkyl halide is treated with alkali metal cyanide, cyanides are obtained as the major product. Assume that AgCN is used instead of NaCN.

  1. What will be the product?
  2. Justify.

Answer:

  1. Isocyanide
  2. Silver cyanide is predominantly covalent. Hence nitrogen atom is free to donate electron pair forming isocyanide as the main product.

Question 4.
How is sulphanilic acid prepared from aniline?
Answer:
Aniline reacts with concentrated sulphuric acid to form anilinium hydrogensulphate which on heating with sulphuric acid at 453-473 K produces sulphanilic acid.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q4 img 4

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 5.
Write chemical equations for the preparation of benzene, fluorobenzene, and nitrobenzene from benzenediazonium chloride.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q5 img 5

Question 6.

  1. What are Schiff s bases?
  2. How are they formed?

Answer:
1. Schiff’s bases are substituted imines.
2. These are formed when 1° amines are treated with carbonyl compounds.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q6 img 6

Question 7.
What are the products formed by the reaction of ethanolic NH3 with C2H5CI? Write the chemical equation.
Answer:
A mixture of ethanamine, N-ethylethanamine and N,N-diethylethanamine are formed
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q7 img 7

Question 8.
Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred for synthesising primary amines.
Answer:
Gabriel phthalimide synthesis involves the conversion of alkyl halide (R – X) to 1° amine (R – NH2). Ammonolysis of R – X, on the other hand give 2°, 3° and quaternary salt as other byproducts. Hence, for the production of pure 1° amines, Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred to ammonolysis reaction.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines two mark q8 img 8

Plus Two Chemistry Amines Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Nitrogen containing functional groups are classified into different types.

  1. Which are they?
  2. Explain one method to prepare cyanide.
  3. Give chemical equations.

Answer:

  1. Nitro compounds, Amines, Cyanides, Isocyanides and Diazo compounds.
  2. When alkyl halides on heating with alcoholic KCN or NaCN cyanide is obtained.
  3. R – X + KCN → R-CN + KX. e.g. CH3 – CH2 -Br + KCN → CH3CH2CN + KBr

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 2.
Consider the following chemical equations:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q2 img 9

  1. a) Identify ‘A’ and ‘B’.
  2. b) Name the reactions.
  3. c) Give any one method to prepare beznene diazonium chloride.

Answer:
1. A – LiAIH4 B – Br2/KOH
2.

  • i) is reduction of acid amide.
  • ii) is Hoffmann’s bromamide degradation reaction.

3. Benzene diazonium chloride can be prepared by diazotization of aniline. It can be done by treating aniline with sodium nitrite and HCI at 273-278 K.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q2 img 10

Question 3.
Chlorobenzene can be prepared from benzene diazonium chloride in two ways.

  1. a) Do you agree with it?
  2. b) Which are the two ways?
  3. c) Write the chemical equation for the reactions.

Answer:
1. Yes.
2. By Sandmeyer’s reaction and Gattermann’s reaction.
3. Sandmeyer’s reaction
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q3 img 11
Gattermann’s reaction
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q3 img 12

Question 4.
Match the following:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q4 img 13
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q4 img 14

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 5.
Diazonium salts are very important class of compounds used for synthesis of variety of aromatic compounds.

  1. How is nitrobenzene prepared from diazonium salt?
  2. Give an example for coupling reaction.
  3. Give an important use of diazonium salt.

Answer:

1. Benzene diazonium chloride is treated with fluoroboric acid to get benzenediazonium fluoroborate which when heated with aqueous sodium nitrite solution in the presence of copper, nitrobenzene is formed.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q5 img 15

2. When benzenediazonium chloride is coupled with aniline in acid medium, p-aminoazobenzene (an yellow azo dye) is formed.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q5 img 16

3. It can be used as intermediate for the synthesis for many organic compounds.

Question 6.
An aromatic compound ‘A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating forms compound ‘B’ which on heating with Br2 and KOH forms a compound ‘C’of molecular formula C6H7N. Write the structures and IUPAC names of compounds A, B, and C.
Answer:
Hoffman bromide reaction
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines three mark q6 img 17

Question 7.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds and classify them into primary, secondary and tertiary amines.

  1. C6H5NHCH3
  2. (CH3CH2)2NCH3
  3. m-BrC6H4NH2

Answer:

  1. N-Methylbenzenamine (2° amine)
  2. N-Ethyl-N-methylethanamine (3° amine)
  3. 3-Bromobenzenamine (1° amine)

Plus Two Chemistry Amines Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
C6H5NH2 gives a foul smelling compound ‘A’ with chloroform in presence of KOH (alcoholic).

  1. What is compound ‘A’?
  2. Write the chemical equation for the reaction.

Answer:

a) ‘A’ is phenyl isocyanide (or phenyl carbylamine)
b) Carbyl amine reaction
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q1 img 18

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 2.
1. In a group discussion, a student argued that alkyl amines are more basic than NH3.

  • Is it correct?
  • Justify your answer with suitable explanation.

2. Arrange the following amines in the decreasing order of basic strength in aqueous solution.
CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, NH3, (CH3)3N Justify.
Answer:
1.

  • Yes.
  • Electron realeasing inductive effect (+l) of alkyl groups increases the availability of lone pair on nitrogen.

2. (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > (CH3)3N > NH3
Inductive effect is maximum for 3° amines. At the same time steric hindrance is maximum for 3° amines. An interplay of the inductive effect, solvation effect and steric hindrance of the alkyl group decides the basic strength of alkylamines.

Question 3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q3 img 19
a) Watch the above diagram and fill the labelled boxes A, B, C, and D.
b) If you are treating B with nitrous acid, predict the product that can be formed.
Answer:
a)
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q3 img 20
b) CH3 CH2 – OH

Question 4.
a) Benzenediazonium chloride is a very important compound in organic chemistry. Give the structure. How it is prepared?
b) How phenol and iodobenzene are prepared from the above compound?
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q4 img 21

Question 5.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q5 img 22
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q5 img 23

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 6.
a) Arrange the following in the increasing order of basic strength.
C6H5NH2, C6H5N(CH3)2, (C2H5)2NH, CH3NH2
b) How will you convert aniline to phenol?
Answer:
a) C6H5NH2 < C6H5N(CH3)2 < CH3NH2 < (C2H5)2NH

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q6 img 24

Question 7.

  1. How is nitrous acid prepared in the laboratory?
  2. A student treated methylamine and aniline separately with nitrous acid. What are the products formed in each case? Give chemical equations.

Answer:
1. By treating hydrochloric acid with sodium nitrite,
2. Methyl amine reacts with nitrous acid to form methyldiazonium salt which being unstable, liberates nitrogen gas quantitatively and forms methanol.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q7 img 25
Aniline reacts with nitrous acid at low temperature (273-278 K) to form benzenediazonium salt, a very important compound used in synthetic organic chemistry.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q7 img 26

Question 8.
Give one chemical test to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds.

  1. Methylamine and dimethylamine
  2. Secondary and tertiary amines
  3. Ethylamine and aniline
  4. Aniline and benzylamine
  5. Aniline and N-methylaniline

Answer:
1. Methyl mine is a 1° amine and so it gives the carbylamine test. When methylamine is warmed with chloroform and alcoholic solution of KOH, foul smelling methyl isocyanide is formed.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q8 img 27
Dimethylamine is a 2° amine and hence it does not answer carbylamine test. Or they can be distinguished by Hinsberg’stest.

2. Secondary and tertiary amines can be distinguished by Hinsberg’s test.
Secondary amines react with Hinsberg’s reagent (benzene sulphonyl chloride) to form N, N- dialkyl benzene sulphonamide which is insoluble in alkali.
Tertiary amines do not react with Hinsberg’s reagent.

3. Ethylamine is an aliphatic 1° amine. When treated with HNO2 (NaNO2 and HCI) it forms ethanol with liberation of N2 gas.

CH3 – CH2 – NH2 + HNO2 → CH3 – CH2 – OH + N2 + H2O

Aniline is an aromatic 1° amine. When treated with HNO2 at low temperature (273 – 278 K) it gives benzene diazonium chloride which undergoes coupling reaction with phenol to form an orange azo dye.

C6H5NH2 + HNO3 + HCI → C6H5N2+ + Cl + 2H2O

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q8 img 28
4. Aniline forms azodye with benzene diazonium chloride but benzyl amine does not.

5. Aniline being a primary amine gives carbylamine test while N-methylaniline being a 2° amine does not answer carbylamine test.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 9.
Write short notes on the following:

  1. Carbylamine reaction.
  2. Hoffman’s bromamide reaction.

Answer:
1. Methyl amine is a 1° amine and so it gives the carbylamine test. When methylamine is warmed with chloroform and alcoholic solution of KOH, foul smelling methyl isocyanide is formed.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q9 img 29

Dimethyl amine is a 2° amine and hence it does not answer carbylamine test. Or they can be distinguished by Hinsberg’stest.

2. When an acid amide is heated with Br2 and an aqueous or ethanolic solution of alkali, a primary amine containing one carbon less than the initial amide is obtained. This is called Hoffmann’s bromamide degradation reaction.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q9 img 30

Question 10.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds and classify them into primary, secondary and tertiary amines.

  1. (CH3)2CHNH2
  2. CH3(CH2)2NH2
  3. CH3NHCH(CH3)2
  4. (CH3)3CNH2

Answer:

  1. Propan-2-amine (1° amine)
  2. Propan-1-amine (1° amine)
  3. N-Methylpropan-2-amine (2° amine)
  4. 2-Methylpropan-2-amine (1° amine)

Question 11.
Account for the following:

  1. pKb of aniline is more than that of methylamine.
  2. Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is not.

Answer:

1. In CH3– NH2, the +l effect of methyl group increases the electron density around N atom and it increases the electron releasing tendency of the molecule. In C6H5 – NH2 the resonance effect causes delocalisation of lone pair over the ring and thereby decreases its basic strength. Since aniline is less basic than methylamine, its pKb value is greater than that of CH3NH2.

2. Solubility of ethylamine in water is attributed to its ability to form hydrogen bonds with water molecules. In aniline the non-polar hydrocarbon part (the ring skeleton) is relatively larger and therefore, has no interactions with polar water molecules. It also decreases the tendency of hydrogen bonding with water molecules. Hence, aniline is not soluble in water.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 12.
Account for the following:

  1. Methylamine in water reacts with ferric chloride to precipitate hydrated ferric oxide.
  2. Although amino group is o- and p- directing in anomatic electrophilic substitution reactions, aniline on nitration gives a substantial amount of m-nitroaniline.

Answer:
1. Methyl amine, being more basic than water exists in water as N-methylammonium hydroxide which reacts with ferric chloride to form hydrated ferric oxide.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q12 img 31

2. Aniline being a base mostly gets protonated in the presence of acids to form anilinium ions (NH3+). For electrophlic ring substitution, – NH2 group is activating and ortho and para directing whereas – NH3+ is deactivating and meta directing. In aniline, the probability of NO2+ attack at para position is relatively more because of steric hinderance at ortho position. Anilinium ion, the attack of NO3+ mostly occurs at meta position.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q12 img 32

Question 13.
Account for the following:

  1. Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction.
  2. Diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic amines.

Answer:
1. Aniline is a base due to electron donating nature of lone pair on N atom of -NH2 goup. Aniline therefore, forms salt with AICI3 which is Lweis acid and a catalyst used in Friedel Craft’s reaction.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q13 img 33
So the catalyst will not be available to produce electrophile.

2. Arenediazonium ion is resonance stabilised whereas no resonance stabilisation occurs in alkyl diazonium ion.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines four mark q13 img 34

Plus Two Chemistry Amines NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds and classify them into primary, secondary and tertiary amines.

  1. (CH3)2CHNH2
  2. CH3(CH2)2NH2
  3. CH3NHCH(CH3)2
  4. (CH3)3CNH2
  5. C6H5NHCH3
  6. (CH3CH2)2NCH3
  7. m-BrC6H4NH2

Answer:

  1. Propan-2-amine (1° amine)
  2. Propan-1-amine (1° amine)
  3. N-Methylpropan-2-amine (2° amine)
  4. 2-Methylpropan-2-amine (1° amine)
  5. N-Methylbenzenamine (2° amine)
  6. N-Ethyl-N-methylethanamine (3° amine)
  7. 3-Bromobenzenamine (1° amine)

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 2.
Give one chemical test to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds.

  1. Methylamine and dimethylamine
  2. Secondary and tertiary amines
  3. Ethylamine and aniline
  4. Aniline and benzylamine
  5. Aniline and N-methylaniline

Answer:
1. Methyl amine is a 1° amine and so it gives the carbylamine test. When methylamine is warmed with chloroform and alcoholic solution of KOH, foul smelling methyl isocyanide is formed.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q2 img 35
Dimethyl amine is a 2° amine and hence it does not answer carbylamine test. Or they can be distinguished by Hinsberg’stest.

2. Secondary and tertiary amines can be distinguished by Hinsberg’stest.

Secondary amines react with Hinsberg’s reagent (benzene sulphonyl chloride) to form N, N- dialkyl benzene sulphonamide which is insoluble in alkali.
Tertiary amines do not react with Hinsberg’s reagent.

3. Ethyl amine is an aliphatic 1° amine. When treated with HNO2 (NaNO2 and HCI) it forms ethanol with liberation of N3 gas.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q2 img 36
Aniline is an aromatic 1° amine. When treated with HNO2 at low temperature (273 – 278 K) it gives benzene diazonium chloride which undergoes coupling reaction with phenol to form an orange azo dye.
C6H5NH2 + HNO3 + HCI → C6H5N2++Cl + 2H2O
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q2 img 37

4. Aniline forms azodye with benzene diazonium chloride but benzyl amine does not.

5. Aniline being a primary amine gives carbylamine test while N-methylaniline being a 2° amine does not answer carbylamine test.

Question 3.
How will you convert:
(i) Ethanoic acid into methanamine
(ii) Hexanenitrile into 1-aminopentane
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q3 img 38
Question 4.
How will you convert:
(i) Methanol to ethanoic acid
(ii) Ethanamine into
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q4 img 39

Question 5.
How will you convert:
(i) Ethanoic acid into propanoic acid
(ii) Nitromethane into dimethylamine
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q5 img 40

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 6.
An aromatic compound ‘A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating forms compound ‘B’ which on heating with Br2 and KOH forms a compound ‘C’ of molecular formula C6H7N. Write the structures and IUPAC names of compounds A, B, and C.
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q6 img 41

Question 7.
Write short notes on the following:

  1. Carbylamine reaction
  2. Diazotisation
  3. Hoffmann’s bromamide reaction
  4. Coupling reaction
  5. Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.

Answer:
1. Carbylamine reaction
Primary amines (both aliphatic and aromatic) when heated with chloroform and ethanolic potassium hydroxide form isocyanides (also known as carbylamines) which have a foul smell. This reaction is called carbylamine reaction and is used as a test for primary amines. Secondary and tertiary amines do not show this reaction.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 42

2. Diazotisation:
Aromatic amines react with nitrous acid (HNO2) at low temperature (273-278 K) to form diazonium salts. The process is known as diazotisation eg.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 43

3. Hofmann’s bromamide reaction:
In this reaction, an acid amide is heated with Br2 and aq. NaOH when 1° amine having one carbon atom less is produced. This involves migration of alkyl or aryl group from carboxyl carbon of the amide to nitrogen atom of the amine. The amine so formed contains one carbon less than that present in amide.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 44

4. Coupling reaction:
Diazonium salts react with phenol and amines to give azo compounds which have an extended conjugate system having both the aromatic rings joined by -N = N – bond. eg.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 45

5. Gabriel phthalimide synthesis:
This method is used for preparing only 1° amines. In this method, phthalimide is treated with alcoholic KOH to give potassium phthalimide, which is treated with alkyl halide or benzyl halide to form N- alkyl or aryl phthalimide. The hydrolysis of N- alkyl phthalimide with 20% HCI under pres¬sure or refluxing with NaOH gives 1° amines.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 46
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 47
The more convenient method is by the treatment of alkyl phthalimide with hydrazene.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q7 img 48
Phthalic acid can again be converted into phthalimide and is used again and again. This method is very useful because it gives pure amines.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines

Question 8.
Give plausible explanation for each of the following:

  1. Why are amines less acidic than alcohols of comparable molecular masses?
  2. Why are primary amines higher boiling than tertiary amines?
  3. Why are aliphatic amines stronger bases than aromatic amines?

Answer:
1. Loss of proton from amines give amide ion whereas loss of a proton from alcohol gives an alkoxide ion.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q8 img 49
Since O is more electronegative than N, therefore, RO can accomodate the -ve charge more eaisly than RNH. Consequently, RO is more stable than RNH. Thus, alcohols are more acidic than amines.

2. Primary amines (RNH2) have two hydrogen atoms on the N atoms and therefore, form intermolecular hydrogen bonding
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q8 img 50
Tertiary amines (R3N) do not have hydrogen atoms on the N atom and therefore, these do not form hydrogen bonding in primary amines, they have higher boiling points than tertiary amines of comparable molecular mass. For example, boiling point of n-butylamine is 351 K while that of tert-butylamine is 319K.

3. Both arylamines and alkalamines are basic in nature due to the presence of lone pair on N-atom. But arylamines are less basic than alkyamines. For example, aniline is less basic than ethylamine as shown by Kb values:
Ethylamine: Kb = 4.7 × 10-4
Aniline: Kb =4.2 × 10-10

The less basic character of aniline can be explained on the basis of aromatic ring present in aniline. Aniline can have the following resonating structures:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 13 Amines ncert q8 img 51
It is clear from the above resonating structures that three of these (II, III and IV) acquire some positive charge on N atom. As a result, the pair of electrons become less available for protonation. Hence, aniline is less basic than ethyl amine in which there is no such resonance.